MPlayer(1)                     The Movie Player                     MPlayer(1)



NAME
       mplayer  - movie player
       mencoder - movie encoder

SYNOPSIS
       mplayer [options] [file|URL|playlist|-]
       mplayer [options] file1 [specific options] [file2] [specific options]
       mplayer [options] {group of files and options} [group-specific options]
       mplayer [br]://[title][/device] [options]
       mplayer [dvd|dvdnav]://[title|[start_title]-end_title][/device]
       [options]
       mplayer vcd://track[/device]
       mplayer tv://[channel][/input_id] [options]
       mplayer radio://[channel|frequency][/capture] [options]
       mplayer pvr:// [options]
       mplayer dvb://[card_number@]channel [options]
       mplayer mf://[filemask|@listfile] [-mf options] [options]
       mplayer [cdda|cddb]://track[-endtrack][:speed][/device] [options]
       mplayer cue://file[:track] [options]
       mplayer
       [file|mms[t]|http|http_proxy|rt[s]p|ftp|udp|unsv|icyx|noicyx|smb]://
       [user:pass@]URL[:port] [options]
       mplayer sdp://file [options]
       mplayer mpst://host[:port]/URL [options]
       mplayer tivo://host/[list|llist|fsid] [options]
       gmplayer [options] [file|URL|playlist] [-skin skin]
       mencoder [options] file [file|URL|-] [-o file | file://file |
       smb://[user:pass@]host/filepath]
       mencoder [options] file1 [specific options] [file2] [specific options]

DESCRIPTION
       mplayer  is  a movie player for Linux (runs on many other platforms and
       CPU architectures, see the documentation).   It  plays  most  MPEG/VOB,
       AVI, ASF/WMA/WMV, RM, QT/MOV/MP4, Ogg/OGM, MKV, VIVO, FLI, NuppelVideo,
       yuv4mpeg, FILM and RoQ files,  supported  by  many  native  and  binary
       codecs.   You  can watch VCD, SVCD, DVD, Blu-ray, 3ivx, DivX 3/4/5, WMV
       and even H.264 movies, too.

       MPlayer supports a wide range of video and audio  output  drivers.   It
       works  with  X11,  Xv, DGA, OpenGL, SVGAlib, fbdev, AAlib, libcaca, Di‐
       rectFB, Quartz, Mac OS X CoreVideo, but you can also use GGI, SDL  (and
       all  their  drivers), VESA (on every VESA-compatible card, even without
       X11), some low-level card-specific drivers (for Matrox, 3dfx  and  ATI)
       and  some  hardware MPEG decoder boards, such as the Siemens DVB, Haup‐
       pauge PVR (IVTV), DXR2 and DXR3/Hollywood+.  Most of them support soft‐
       ware or hardware scaling, so you can enjoy movies in fullscreen mode.

       MPlayer  has an onscreen display (OSD) for status information, nice big
       antialiased shaded subtitles and visual feedback for keyboard controls.
       European/ISO8859-1,2 (Hungarian, English, Czech, etc), Cyrillic and Ko‐
       rean fonts are supported along with 12 subtitle formats (MicroDVD, Sub‐
       Rip,  OGM, SubViewer, Sami, VPlayer, RT, SSA, AQTitle, JACOsub, PJS and
       our own: MPsub) and DVD subtitles (SPU streams, VOBsub and Closed  Cap‐
       tions).

       mencoder  (MPlayer's Movie Encoder) is a simple movie encoder, designed
       to encode MPlayer-playable movies (see above) to other MPlayer-playable
       formats  (see  below).   It  encodes  to MPEG-4 (DivX/Xvid), one of the
       libavcodec codecs and PCM/MP3/VBRMP3 audio in 1, 2 or 3  passes.   Fur‐
       thermore  it  has  stream  copying  abilities, a powerful filter system
       (crop, expand, flip, postprocess, rotate, scale, noise, RGB/YUV conver‐
       sion) and more.

       gmplayer  is MPlayer with a graphical user interface.  Besides some own
       options (stored in gui.conf), it has the same options as MPlayer,  how‐
       ever  some  MPlayer options will be stored in gui.conf so that they can
       be chosen independently from MPlayer. (See GUI CONFIGURATION  FILE  be‐
       low.)

       Usage  examples  to  get you started quickly can be found at the end of
       this man page.

       Also see the HTML documentation!

INTERACTIVE CONTROL
       MPlayer has a fully configurable, command-driven  control  layer  which
       allows you to control MPlayer using keyboard, mouse, joystick or remote
       control (with LIRC).  See the -input option for ways to customize it.

       keyboard control
              LEFT and RIGHT
                   Seek backward/forward 10 seconds.
              UP and DOWN
                   Seek forward/backward 1 minute.
              PGUP and PGDWN
                   Seek forward/backward 10 minutes.
              [ and ]
                   Decrease/increase current playback speed by 10%.
              { and }
                   Halve/double current playback speed.
              BACKSPACE
                   Reset playback speed to normal.
              < and >
                   Go backward/forward in the playlist.
              ENTER
                   Go forward in the playlist, even over the end.
              HOME and END
                   next/previous playtree entry in the parent list
              INS and DEL (ASX playlist only)
                   next/previous alternative source.
              p / SPACE
                   Pause (pressing again unpauses).
              .
                   Step forward.  Pressing once will pause movie,  every  con‐
                   secutive  press  will play one frame and then go into pause
                   mode again (any other key unpauses).
              q / ESC
                   Stop playing and quit.
              U
                   Stop playing (and quit if -idle is not used).
              + and -
                   Adjust audio delay by +/- 0.1 seconds.
              / and *
                   Decrease/increase volume.
              9 and 0
                   Decrease/increase volume.
              ( and )
                   Adjust audio balance in favor of left/right channel.
              m
                   Mute sound.
              _ (MPEG-TS, AVI and libavformat only)
                   Cycle through the available video tracks.
              # (DVD, Blu-ray, MPEG, Matroska, AVI and libavformat only)
                   Cycle through the available audio tracks.
              TAB (MPEG-TS and libavformat only)
                   Cycle through the available programs.
              f
                   Toggle fullscreen (also see -fs).
              T
                   Toggle stay-on-top (also see -ontop).
              w and e
                   Decrease/increase pan-and-scan range.
              o
                   Toggle OSD states: none / seek / seek  +  timer  /  seek  +
                   timer + total time.
              d
                   Toggle  frame  dropping  states: none / skip display / skip
                   decoding (see -framedrop and -hardframedrop).
              v
                   Toggle subtitle visibility.
              j and J
                   Cycle through the available subtitles.
              y and g
                   Step forward/backward in the subtitle list.
              F
                   Toggle displaying "forced subtitles".
              a
                   Toggle subtitle alignment: top / middle / bottom.
              x and z
                   Adjust subtitle delay by +/- 0.1 seconds.
              c (-capture only)
                   Start/stop capturing the primary stream.
              r and t
                   Move subtitles up/down.
              i (-edlout mode only)
                   Set start or end of an EDL skip and write  it  out  to  the
                   given file.
              s (-vf screenshot only)
                   Take a screenshot.
              S (-vf screenshot only)
                   Start/stop taking screenshots.
              I
                   Show filename on the OSD.
              P
                   Show  progression  bar,  elapsed time and total duration on
                   the OSD.
              ! and @
                   Seek to the beginning of the previous/next chapter.
              D (-vo xvmc, -vo vdpau, -vf yadif, -vf kerndeint only)
                   Activate/deactivate deinterlacer.
              A    Cycle through the available DVD angles.

              (The following keys are valid only when using a hardware  accel‐
              erated  video  output  (xv, (x)vidix, (x)mga, etc), the software
              equalizer (-vf eq or -vf eq2) or hue filter (-vf hue).)

              1 and 2
                   Adjust contrast.
              3 and 4
                   Adjust brightness.
              5 and 6
                   Adjust hue.
              7 and 8
                   Adjust saturation.

              (The following keys are valid only  when  using  the  quartz  or
              corevideo video output driver.)

              command + 0
                   Resize movie window to half its original size.
              command + 1
                   Resize movie window to its original size.
              command + 2
                   Resize movie window to double its original size.
              command + f
                   Toggle fullscreen (also see -fs).
              command + [ and command + ]
                   Set movie window alpha.

              (The following keys are valid only when using the sdl video out‐
              put driver.)

              c
                   Cycle through available fullscreen modes.
              n
                   Restore original mode.

              (The following keys are valid if you have a keyboard with multi‐
              media keys.)

              PAUSE
                   Pause.
              STOP
                   Stop playing and quit.
              PREVIOUS and NEXT
                   Seek backward/forward 1 minute.

              (The  following  keys  are only valid if you compiled with TV or
              DVB input support and will take precedence over the keys defined
              above.)

              h and k
                   Select previous/next channel.
              n
                   Change norm.
              u
                   Change channel list.

              (The  following  keys are only valid if you compiled with dvdnav
              support: They are used to navigate the menus.)

              keypad 8
                   Select button up.
              keypad 2
                   Select button down.
              keypad 4
                   Select button left.
              keypad 6
                   Select button right.
              keypad 5
                   Return to main menu.
              keypad 7
                   Return to nearest menu (the order of preference  is:  chap‐
                   ter->title->root).
              keypad ENTER
                   Confirm choice.

              (The  following  keys  are used for controlling TV teletext. The
              data may come from either an analog TV source or an MPEG  trans‐
              port stream.)

              X
                   Switch teletext on/off.
              Q and W
                   Go to next/prev teletext page.

       mouse control
              button 3 and button 4
                   Seek backward/forward 1 minute.
              button 5 and button 6
                   Decrease/increase volume.

       joystick control
              left and right
                   Seek backward/forward 10 seconds.
              up and down
                   Seek forward/backward 1 minute.
              button 1
                   Pause.
              button 2
                   Toggle  OSD  states:  none  /  seek / seek + timer / seek +
                   timer + total time.
              button 3 and button 4
                   Decrease/increase volume.

USAGE
       Every 'flag' option has a 'noflag' counterpart, e.g.  the  opposite  of
       the -fs option is -nofs.

       If  an option is marked as (XXX only), it will only work in combination
       with the XXX option or if XXX is compiled in.

       NOTE: The suboption parser (used for example for  -ao  pcm  suboptions)
       supports a special kind of string-escaping intended for use with exter‐
       nal GUIs.
       It has the following format:
       %n%string_of_length_n
       EXAMPLES:
       mplayer -ao pcm:file=%10%C:test.wav test.avi
       Or in a script:
       mplayer -ao pcm:file=%`expr length "$NAME"`%"$NAME" test.avi

CONFIGURATION FILES
       You can put all of the options in configuration  files  which  will  be
       read every time MPlayer/MEncoder is run.  The system-wide configuration
       file 'mplayer.conf' is in  your  configuration  directory  (e.g.  /etc/
       mplayer or /usr/local/etc/mplayer), the user specific one is '~/.mplay‐
       er/config'.  The configuration file for MEncoder is 'mencoder.conf'  in
       your  configuration  directory  (e.g.  /etc/mplayer  or /usr/local/etc/
       mplayer), the user specific one  is  '~/.mplayer/mencoder.conf'.   User
       specific  options  override  system-wide  options (in case of gmplayer,
       gui.conf options override user specific options) and options  given  on
       the  command  line override all.  The syntax of the configuration files
       is 'option=<value>', everything after a '#' is  considered  a  comment.
       Options  that  work  without  values  can be enabled by setting them to
       'yes' or '1' or 'true' and disabled by setting them to 'no' or  '0'  or
       'false'.  Even suboptions can be specified in this way.

       You  can  also write file-specific configuration files.  If you wish to
       have a configuration file for a file called 'movie.avi', create a  file
       named  'movie.avi.conf' with the file-specific options in it and put it
       in ~/.mplayer/.  You can also put the configuration file  in  the  same
       directory  as  the  file  to  be  played,  as  long  as  you  give  the
       -use-filedir-conf option (either on the command line or in your  global
       config  file).   If  a file-specific configuration file is found in the
       same directory, no file-specific configuration is loaded from ~/.mplay‐
       er.   In  addition, the -use-filedir-conf option enables directory-spe‐
       cific configuration files.  For this, MPlayer first  tries  to  load  a
       mplayer.conf  from the same directory as the file played and then tries
       to load any file-specific configuration.

       EXAMPLE MPLAYER CONFIGURATION FILE:

       # Use Matrox driver by default.
       vo=xmga
       # I love practicing handstands while watching videos.
       flip=yes
       # Decode/encode multiple files from PNG,
       # start with mf://filemask
       mf=type=png:fps=25
       # Eerie negative images are cool.
       vf=eq2=1.0:-0.8
       # OSD progress bar vertical alignment
       progbar-align=50

       EXAMPLE MENCODER CONFIGURATION FILE:

       # Make MEncoder output to a default filename.
       o=encoded.avi
       # The next 4 lines allow mencoder tv:// to start capturing immediately.
       oac=pcm=yes
       ovc=lavc=yes
       lavcopts=vcodec=mjpeg
       tv=driver=v4l2:input=1:width=768:height=576:device=/dev/video0:audiorate=48000
       # more complex default encoding option set
       lavcopts=vcodec=mpeg4:autoaspect=1
       lameopts=aq=2:vbr=4
       ovc=lavc=1
       oac=lavc=1
       passlogfile=pass1stats.log
       noautoexpand=1
       subfont-autoscale=3
       subfont-osd-scale=6
       subfont-text-scale=4
       subalign=2
       subpos=96
       spuaa=20

       GUI CONFIGURATION FILE

       GUI's own options are (MPlayer option  names  in  parentheses):  ao_al‐
       sa_device  (alsa:device=)  (ALSA only), ao_alsa_mixer (mixer) (ALSA on‐
       ly), ao_alsa_mixer_channel (mixer-channel) (ALSA  only),  ao_esd_device
       (esd:)  (ESD  only),  ao_extra_stereo  (af extrastereo) (default: 1.0),
       ao_extra_stereo_coefficient  (af  extrastereo=),  ao_oss_device  (oss:)
       (OSS only), ao_oss_mixer (mixer) (OSS only), ao_oss_mixer_channel (mix‐
       er-channel) (OSS only), ao_sdl_subdriver (sdl:) (SDL only), ao_surround
       (unused),  ao_volnorm  (af  volnorm),  autosync  (enable/disable),  au‐
       tosync_size (autosync), cache (enable/disable), cache_size (cache), en‐
       able_audio_equ  (af equalizer), equ_band_00 ... equ_band_59, (af equal‐
       izer=), equ_channel_1 ... equ_channel_6 (af channels=), gui_main_pos_x,
       gui_main_pos_y,   gui_save_pos   (yes/no),   gui_tv_digital   (yes/no),
       gui_video_out_pos_x, gui_video_out_pos_y, playbar (enable/disable), re‐
       play_gain     (enable/disable),    replay_gain_adjustment    (-30..10),
       show_videowin (yes/no), vf_lavc (vf lavc) (DXR3 only), vf_pp  (vf  pp),
       vo_dxr3_device (unused) (DXR3 only).

       MPlayer  options  stored  in gui.conf (GUI option names, MPlayer option
       names in parentheses) are: a_afm (afm), ao_driver (ao), ass_bottom_mar‐
       gin  (ass-bottom-margin)  (ASS  only),  ass_enabled  (ass)  (ASS only),
       ass_top_margin (ass-top-margin) (ASS only),  ass_use_margins  (ass-use-
       margins)  (ASS  only), cdrom_device (cdrom-device), dvd_device (dvd-de‐
       vice), font_autoscale (subfont-autoscale)  (FreeType  only),  font_blur
       (subfont-blur)   (FreeType   only),  font_encoding  (subfont-encoding),
       font_factor (ffactor), font_name (font),  font_osd_scale  (subfont-osd-
       scale) (FreeType only), font_outline (subfont-outline) (FreeType only),
       font_text_scale (subfont-text-scale) (FreeType only), gui_skin  (skin),
       idle  (idle), load_fullscreen (fs), osd_level (osdlevel), playlist_sup‐
       port     (allow-dangerous-playlist-parsing),     softvol     (softvol),
       stopxscreensaver  (stop-xscreensaver),  sub_auto_load (autosub), sub_cp
       (subcp)  (iconv  only),  sub_overlap  (overlapsub),  sub_pos  (subpos),
       sub_unicode  (unicode),  sub_utf8  (utf8),  v_flip  (flip), v_framedrop
       (framedrop), v_idx (idx), v_ni (ni),  v_vfm  (vfm),  vf_autoq  (autoq),
       vo_direct_render  (panscan),  vo_doublebuffering  (dr), vo_driver (vo),
       vo_panscan (double).

PROFILES
       To ease working with different configurations profiles can  be  defined
       in  the  configuration  files.   A profile starts with its name between
       square brackets, e.g. '[my-profile]'.  All following  options  will  be
       part of the profile.  A description (shown by -profile help) can be de‐
       fined with the profile-desc option.  To end the profile, start  another
       one or use the profile name 'default' to continue with normal options.

       EXAMPLE MPLAYER PROFILE:


       [protocol.dvd]
       profile-desc="profile for dvd:// streams"
       vf=pp=hb/vb/dr/al/fd
       alang=en

       [protocol.dvdnav]
       profile-desc="profile for dvdnav:// streams"
       profile=protocol.dvd
       mouse-movements=yes
       nocache=yes

       [extension.flv]
       profile-desc="profile for .flv files"
       flip=yes

       [vo.pnm]
       outdir=/tmp

       [ao.alsa]
       device=spdif

       EXAMPLE MENCODER PROFILE:


       [mpeg4]
       profile-desc="MPEG4 encoding"
       ovc=lacv=yes
       lavcopts=vcodec=mpeg4:vbitrate=1200

       [mpeg4-hq]
       profile-desc="HQ MPEG4 encoding"
       profile=mpeg4
       lavcopts=mbd=2:trell=yes:v4mv=yes

GENERAL OPTIONS
       -codecpath <dir>
              Specify a directory for binary codecs.

       -codecs-file <filename> (also see -afm, -ac, -vfm, -vc)
              Override the standard search path and use the specified file in‐
              stead of the builtin codecs.conf.

       -include <configuration file> (also see -gui-include)
              Specify configuration file to be parsed after the default ones.

       -list-options
              Prints all available options.

       -msgcharset <charset>
              Convert console messages to the  specified  character  set  (de‐
              fault: autodetect).  Text will be in the encoding specified with
              the --charset configure option.  Set this to "noconv" to disable
              conversion (for e.g. iconv problems).
              NOTE:  The  option  takes  effect after command line parsing has
              finished.  The MPLAYER_CHARSET environment variable can help you
              get rid of the first lines of garbled output.

       -msgcolor
              Enable  colorful  console  output on terminals that support ANSI
              color.

       -msglevel <all=<level>:<module>=<level>:...>
              Control verbosity directly for each module.   The  'all'  module
              changes  the  verbosity of all the modules not explicitly speci‐
              fied on the command line.  See '-msglevel help' for  a  list  of
              all modules.
              NOTE:  Some  messages  are  printed  before  the command line is
              parsed and are therefore not affected by -msglevel.  To  control
              these  messages  you have to use the MPLAYER_VERBOSE environment
              variable, see its description below for details.
              Available levels:
                 -1   complete silence
                  0   fatal messages only
                  1   error messages
                  2   warning messages
                  3   short hints
                  4   informational messages
                  5   status messages (default)
                  6   verbose messages
                  7   debug level 2
                  8   debug level 3
                  9   debug level 4

       -msgmodule
              Prepend module name in front of each console message.

       -noconfig <options>
              Do not parse selected configuration files.
              NOTE: If -include or -use-filedir-conf options are specified  at
              the command line, they will be honoured.

              Available options are:
                 all
                      all configuration files
                 gui (GUI only)
                      GUI configuration file
                 system
                      system configuration file
                 user
                      user configuration file

       -quiet
              Make  console  output  less verbose; in particular, prevents the
              status line (i.e. A:   0.7 V:   0.6 A-V:  0.068 ...) from  being
              displayed.  Particularly useful on slow terminals or broken ones
              which do not properly handle carriage return (i.e. \r).

       -priority <prio> (Windows and OS/2 only)
              Set process priority for MPlayer  according  to  the  predefined
              priorities available under Windows and OS/2.  Possible values of
              <prio>:
                 idle|belownormal|normal|abovenormal|high|realtime

              WARNING: Using realtime priority can cause system lockup.

       -profile <profile1,profile2,...>
              Use the given profile(s), -profile help displays a list  of  the
              defined profiles.

       -really-quiet (also see -quiet)
              Display  even  less output and status messages than with -quiet.
              Also suppresses the GUI error message boxes.

       -show-profile <profile>
              Show the description and content of a profile.

       -use-filedir-conf
              Look for a file-specific configuration file in the same directo‐
              ry as the file that is being played.
              WARNING: May be dangerous if playing from untrusted media.

       -v
              Increment  verbosity  level,  one level for each -v found on the
              command line.

PLAYER OPTIONS (MPLAYER ONLY)
       -autoq <quality> (use with -vf [s]pp)
              Dynamically changes the level of postprocessing depending on the
              available  spare  CPU  time.  The number you specify will be the
              maximum level used.  Usually you can use some big  number.   You
              have  to  use  -vf [s]pp without parameters in order for this to
              work.

       -autosync <factor>
              Gradually adjusts the A/V sync based  on  audio  delay  measure‐
              ments.   Specifying  -autosync  0, the default, will cause frame
              timing to be based entirely on audio delay measurements.  Speci‐
              fying  -autosync  1 will do the same, but will subtly change the
              A/V correction algorithm.  An uneven video framerate in a  movie
              which  plays  fine  with -nosound can often be helped by setting
              this to an integer value greater than 1.  The higher the  value,
              the  closer the timing will be to -nosound.  Try -autosync 30 to
              smooth out problems with sound drivers which do not implement  a
              perfect  audio delay measurement.  With this value, if large A/V
              sync offsets occur, they will only take about 1 or 2 seconds  to
              settle  out.   This delay in reaction time to sudden A/V offsets
              should be the only side-effect of turning this  option  on,  for
              all sound drivers.

       -benchmark
              Prints  some  statistics  on CPU usage and dropped frames at the
              end of playback.  Use in combination with -nosound and -vo  null
              for benchmarking only the video codec.
              NOTE:  With  this option MPlayer will also ignore frame duration
              when playing only video (you can think of that as infinite fps).

       -colorkey <number>
              Changes the colorkey to an RGB value of your  choice.   0x000000
              is  black  and 0xffffff is white.  Only supported by the cvidix,
              fbdev, svga, vesa, winvidix, xmga, xvidix, xover,  xv  (see  -vo
              xv:ck), xvmc (see -vo xv:ck) and directx video output drivers.

       -nocolorkey
              Disables  colorkeying.  Only supported by the cvidix, fbdev, sv‐
              ga, vesa, winvidix, xmga, xvidix, xover,  xv  (see  -vo  xv:ck),
              xvmc (see -vo xv:ck) and directx video output drivers.

       -correct-pts (EXPERIMENTAL)
              Switches  MPlayer  to  an experimental mode where timestamps for
              video frames are calculated differently and video filters  which
              add  new  frames  or modify timestamps of existing ones are sup‐
              ported.  The more accurate timestamps can be visible for example
              when  playing subtitles timed to scene changes with the -ass op‐
              tion.  Without -correct-pts the subtitle timing  will  typically
              be off by some frames.  This option does not work correctly with
              some demuxers and codecs.

       -crash-debug (DEBUG CODE)
              Automatically attaches gdb upon crash or SIGTRAP.  Support  must
              be compiled in by configuring with --enable-crash-debug.

       -doubleclick-time
              Time in milliseconds to recognize two consecutive button presses
              as a double-click (default: 300).  Set to 0 to let your  window‐
              ing system decide what a double-click is (-vo directx only).
              NOTE:  You  will  get  slightly different behaviour depending on
              whether you bind MOUSE_BTN0_DBL or MOUSE_BTN0-MOUSE_BTN0_DBL.

       -edlout <filename>
              Creates a new file and writes edit decision list  (EDL)  records
              to  it.  During playback, the user hits 'i' to mark the start or
              end of a skip block.  This provides a starting point from  which
              the user can fine-tune EDL entries later.  See http://www.mplay‐
              erhq.hu/DOCS/HTML/en/edl.html for details.

       -edl-backward-delay <number>
              When using EDL during playback and jumping backwards it is  pos‐
              sible  to  end  up in the middle of an EDL record.  In that case
              MPlayer will seek further backwards to the start position of the
              EDL  record and then immediately skip the scene specified in the
              EDL record.  To avoid this kind of behavior, MPlayer jumps to  a
              fixed  time  interval  before the start of the EDL record.  This
              parameter allows you to specify that time  interval  in  seconds
              (default: 2 seconds).

       -edl-start-pts
              Adjust  positions  in  EDL  records  according to playing file's
              start time.  Some formats, especially MPEG TS usually start with
              non-zero PTS values and when producing EDL file with -edlout op‐
              tion, EDL records contain absolute values that are correct  only
              for  this  particular file.  If re-encoded into a different for‐
              mat, this EDL file no longer applies.  Specifying -edl-start-pts
              will automatically adjust EDL positions according to start time:
              when producing EDL file, it will substract start time from every
              EDL record, when playing with EDL file, it will add file's start
              time to every EDL position.

       -noedl-start-pts
              Disable adjusting EDL positions.

       -enqueue (GUI only)
              Enqueue files given on the command line in the playlist  instead
              of playing them immediately.

       -fixed-vo
              Enforces  a  fixed video system for multiple files (one (un)ini‐
              tialization for all files).  Therefore only one window  will  be
              opened  for  all  files.   Currently  the  following drivers are
              fixed-vo compliant: gl, gl_tiled,  mga,  svga,  x11,  xmga,  xv,
              xvidix and dfbmga.

       -framedrop  (also  see  -hardframedrop,  experimental  without  -nocor‐
       rect-pts)
              Skip displaying some frames to maintain A/V sync  on  slow  sys‐
              tems.   Video  filters  are  not applied to such frames.  For B-
              frames even decoding is skipped completely.

       -(no)gui
              Enable or disable the GUI interface (default depends  on  binary
              name).   Only  works  as the first argument on the command line.
              Does not work as a config-file option.

       -gui-include <GUI configuration file> (also see -include) (GUI only)
              Specify a GUI configuration file to be parsed after the  default
              gui.conf.

       -h, -help, --help
              Show short summary of options.

       -hardframedrop (experimental without -nocorrect-pts)
              More  intense  frame dropping (breaks decoding).  Leads to image
              distortion!  Note that especially the libmpeg2 decoder may crash
              with this, so consider using "-vc ffmpeg12,".

       -heartbeat-cmd
              Command  that  is  executed every 30 seconds during playback via
              system() - i.e. using the shell.

              NOTE: MPlayer uses this command without any checking, it is your
              responsibility  to  ensure  it  does not cause security problems
              (e.g. make sure to use full paths if "." is in your path like on
              Windows).   It also only works when playing video (i.e. not with
              -novideo but works with -vo null).

              This can be "misused" to disable screensavers that do  not  sup‐
              port  the  proper  X  API (also see -stop-xscreensaver).  If you
              think this is too complicated, ask the author of the screensaver
              program to support the proper X APIs.

              EXAMPLE   for  xscreensaver:  mplayer  -heartbeat-cmd  "xscreen‐
              saver-command -deactivate" file

              EXAMPLE   for   GNOME   screensaver:   mplayer    -heartbeat-cmd
              "gnome-screensaver-command -p" file

       -heartbeat-interval
              Specify how often the -heartbeat-cmd should be executed, in sec‐
              onds between executions (default: 30.0).

       -identify
              Shorthand for -msglevel identify=6.  Show file parameters in  an
              easily  parseable format.  Also prints more detailed information
              about subtitle and audio track languages and IDs.  For  example,
              for  a  DVD or Blu-ray it will list the chapters and time length
              of each title, as well as a disk ID.  Combine this with  -frames
              0 to suppress all video output.  The wrapper script TOOLS/miden‐
              tify.sh suppresses the  other  MPlayer  output  and  (hopefully)
              shellescapes the filenames.  You can get less information by us‐
              ing -msglevel identify=4.

       -idle (also see -slave)
              Makes MPlayer wait idly instead of quitting  when  there  is  no
              file  to play.  Mostly useful in slave mode where MPlayer can be
              controlled through input commands.
              For gmplayer -idle is the default, -noidle will quit the GUI af‐
              ter all files have been played.

       -input <commands>
              This  option can be used to configure certain parts of the input
              system.  Paths are relative to ~/.mplayer/.
              NOTE: Autorepeat is currently only supported by joysticks.

              Available commands are:

                 conf=<filename>
                      Specify input configuration file other than the  default
                      ~/.mplayer/input.conf.  ~/.mplayer/<filename> is assumed
                      if no full path is given.
                 ar-dev=<device>
                      Device to be used for Apple IR Remote  (default  is  au‐
                      todetected, Linux only).
                 ar-delay
                      Delay  in  milliseconds  before we start to autorepeat a
                      key (0 to disable).
                 ar-rate
                      Number of key presses to generate per second on  autore‐
                      peat.
                 (no)default-bindings
                      Use the key bindings that MPlayer ships with by default.
                 keylist
                      Prints all keys that can be bound to commands.
                 cmdlist
                      Prints all commands that can be bound to keys.
                 js-dev
                      Specifies  the joystick device to use (default: /dev/in‐
                      put/js0).
                 file=<filename>
                      Read commands from the given file.  Mostly useful with a
                      FIFO.
                      NOTE:  When  the given file is a FIFO MPlayer opens both
                      ends so you can do several 'echo "seek  10"  >  mp_pipe'
                      and the pipe will stay valid.

       -key-fifo-size <2-65000>
              Specify  the  size of the FIFO that buffers key events (default:
              7).  A FIFO of size n can buffer (n-1) events.   If  it  is  too
              small  some  events  may be lost.  If it is too big, MPlayer may
              seem to hang while it processes the buffered events.  To get the
              same  behavior as before this option was introduced, set it to 2
              for Linux or 1024 for Windows.  For small value you should  dis‐
              able  double-clicks by setting -doubleclick-time to 0 so they do
              not compete with regular events for buffer space.

       -lircconf <filename> (LIRC only)
              Specifies a configuration file for LIRC (default: ~/.lircrc).

       -list-properties
              Print a list of the available properties.

       -loop <number>
              Loops movie playback <number>  times.   0  means  forever.   Use
              -loop 0 to automatically reconnect to live streaming URLs.

       -menu (OSD menu only)
              Turn on OSD menu support.

       -menu-cfg <filename> (OSD menu only)
              Use an alternative menu.conf.

       -menu-chroot <path> (OSD menu only)
              Chroot the file selection menu to a specific location.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -menu-chroot /home
                      Will restrict the file selection menu to /home and down‐
                      ward  (i.e.  no  access  to  /  will  be  possible,  but
                      /home/user_name will).

       -menu-keepdir (OSD menu only)
              File browser starts from the last known location instead of cur‐
              rent directory.

       -menu-root <value> (OSD menu only)
              Specify the main menu.

       -menu-startup (OSD menu only)
              Display the main menu at MPlayer startup.

       -mouse-movements
              Permit MPlayer to receive pointer events reported by  the  video
              output  driver.   Necessary  to select the buttons in DVD menus.
              Supported for X11-based VOs (x11, xv, xvmc,  etc)  and  the  gl,
              gl_tiled, direct3d and corevideo VOs.

       -noar  Turns off AppleIR remote support.

       -noconsolecontrols
              Prevent  MPlayer  from  reading  key events from standard input.
              Useful when reading data from standard input.  This is automati‐
              cally  enabled  when  - is found on the command line.  There are
              situations where you have to set it manually, e.g. if  you  open
              /dev/stdin  (or  the  equivalent on your system), use stdin in a
              playlist or intend to read from stdin later on via the  loadfile
              or loadlist slave commands.

       -nojoystick
              Turns off joystick support.

       -nolirc
              Turns off LIRC support.

       -nomouseinput
              Disable  mouse button press/release input (mozplayerxp's context
              menu relies on this option).

       -rtc (RTC only)
              Turns on usage of the Linux RTC (realtime clock -  /dev/rtc)  as
              timing  mechanism.   This wakes up the process every 1/1024 sec‐
              onds to check the current time.  Useless with modern Linux  ker‐
              nels  configured  for  desktop  use  as they already wake up the
              process with similar accuracy when using normal timed sleep.

       -pausing <0-3> (MPlayer only)
              Specifies  the  default  pausing  behaviour  of  commands,  i.e.
              whether  MPlayer will continue playback or stay paused after the
              command has finished.  See DOCS/tech/slave.txt for  further  de‐
              tails.
                 0    resume
                 1    pause (pausing)
                 2    keep the paused / playing status (pausing_keep)
                 3    toggle the paused / playing status (pausing_toggle)
                 4    pause   without   frame   step   (experimental)   (paus‐
                      ing_keep_force)

       -playing-msg <string>
              Print out a string before starting playback.  The following  ex‐
              pansions are supported:

                 ${NAME}
                      Expand to the value of the property NAME.

                 ?(NAME:TEXT)
                      Expand TEXT only if the property NAME is available.

                 ?(!NAME:TEXT)
                      Expand TEXT only if the property NAME is not available.

       -playlist <filename>
              Play  files  according to a playlist file (ASX, Winamp, SMIL, or
              one-file-per-line format).
              WARNING: The way MPlayer parses and uses playlist files  is  not
              safe  against  maliciously  constructed  files.   Such files may
              trigger harmful actions.  This has been the case for all MPlayer
              versions,  but  unfortunately  this fact was not well documented
              earlier, and some people have even misguidedly  recommended  use
              of  -playlist with untrusted sources.  Do NOT use -playlist with
              random internet sources or files you don't trust!
              NOTE: This option is considered an entry so options found  after
              it will apply only to the elements of this playlist.
              FIXME: This needs to be clarified and documented thoroughly.

       -allow-dangerous-playlist-parsing
              This enables parsing any file as a playlist if e.g. a server ad‐
              vertises a file as  playlist.   Only  enable  if  you  know  all
              servers  involved  are  trustworthy.  MPlayer's playlist code is
              not designed to handle malicious playlist files.

       -rtc-device <device>
              Use the specified device for RTC timing.

       -shuffle
              Play files in random order.

       -skin <name> (GUI only)
              Loads a skin from the directory given as parameter below the de‐
              fault  skin directories, ~/.mplayer/skins/ and /usr/local/share/
              mplayer/skins/.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -skin fittyfene
                      Tries ~/.mplayer/skins/fittyfene and afterwards /usr/lo‐
                      cal/share/mplayer/skins/fittyfene.

       -slave (also see -input)
              Switches  on slave mode, in which MPlayer works as a backend for
              other programs.  Instead of intercepting keyboard events, MPlay‐
              er will read commands separated by a newline (\n) from stdin.
              NOTE:  See  -input  cmdlist  for  a  list  of slave commands and
              DOCS/tech/slave.txt for their description.  Also,  this  is  not
              intended to disable other inputs, e.g. via the video window, use
              some other method like -input  nodefault-bindings:conf=/dev/null
              for that.

       -softsleep
              Time  frames  by repeatedly checking the current time instead of
              asking the kernel to wake up MPlayer at the correct time.   Use‐
              ful  if  your  kernel timing is imprecise and you cannot use the
              RTC either.  Comes at the price of higher CPU consumption.

       -sstep <sec>
              Skip <sec> seconds after every frame.  The normal  framerate  of
              the  movie  is  kept, so playback is accelerated.  Since MPlayer
              can only seek to the next keyframe this may be inexact.

       -udp-ip <ip>
              Sets the destination address for datagrams sent by the -udp-mas‐
              ter.   Setting  it to a broadcast address allows multiple slaves
              having the same broadcast address to sync  to  the  master  (de‐
              fault: 127.0.0.1).

       -udp-master
              Send a datagram to -udp-ip on -udp-port just before playing each
              frame.  The datagram indicates  the  master's  position  in  the
              file.

       -udp-port <port>
              Sets the destination port for datagrams sent by the -udp-master,
              and the port a -udp-slave listens on (default: 23867).

       -udp-seek-threshold <sec>
              When the master seeks, the slave has to decide whether  to  seek
              as  well,  or to catch up by decoding frames without pausing be‐
              tween frames.  If the master is more  than  <sec>  seconds  away
              from  the slave, the slave seeks.  Otherwise, it "runs" to catch
              up or waits for the master.  This should almost always  be  left
              at its default setting of 1 second.

       -udp-slave
              Listen on -udp-port and match the master's position.

DEMUXER/STREAM OPTIONS
       -a52drc <level>
              Select  the  Dynamic  Range  Compression  level  for  AC-3 audio
              streams.  <level> is a float value ranging from 0 to 1, where  0
              means  no  compression  and  1 (which is the default) means full
              compression (make loud passages more  silent  and  vice  versa).
              Values  up  to 2 are also accepted, but are purely experimental.
              This option only shows an effect if the AC-3 stream contains the
              required range compression information.

       -aid <ID> (also see -alang)
              Select  audio channel (MPEG: 0-31, AVI/OGM: 1-99, ASF/RM: 0-127,
              VOB(AC-3):  128-159,  VOB(LPCM):  160-191,   MPEG-TS   17-8190).
              MPlayer  prints the available audio IDs when run in verbose (-v)
              mode.  When playing an MPEG-TS stream, MPlayer/MEncoder will use
              the first program (if present) with the chosen audio stream.

       -ausid <ID> (also see -alang)
              Select  audio  substream  channel.  Currently the valid range is
              0x55..0x75 and applies only to MPEG-TS when handled by  the  na‐
              tive  demuxer  (not by libavformat).  The format type may not be
              correctly identified because of how this  information  (or  lack
              thereof)  is embedded in the stream, but it will demux correctly
              the audio streams when multiple substreams are present.  MPlayer
              prints the available substream IDs when run with -identify.

       -alang <language code[,language code,...]> (also see -aid)
              Specify  a  priority  list of audio languages to use.  Different
              container formats employ different language codes.  DVDs use ISO
              639-1  two  letter language codes, Matroska, MPEG-TS and NUT use
              ISO 639-2 three letter language codes while OGM uses a free-form
              identifier.   MPlayer prints the available languages when run in
              verbose (-v) mode.

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer dvd://1 -alang hu,en
                      Chooses the Hungarian language track on a DVD and  falls
                      back on English if Hungarian is not available.
                 mplayer -alang jpn example.mkv
                      Plays a Matroska file in Japanese.

       -audio-demuxer <[+]name> (-audiofile only)
              Force  audio  demuxer type for -audiofile.  Use a '+' before the
              name to force it, this will skip some checks!  Give the  demuxer
              name  as  printed by -audio-demuxer help.  For backward compati‐
              bility it also accepts the demuxer ID as defined in  libmpdemux/
              demuxer.h.   -audio-demuxer  audio  or  -audio-demuxer 17 forces
              MP3.

       -audiofile <filename>
              Play audio from an external file (WAV, MP3 or Ogg Vorbis)  while
              viewing a movie.

       -audiofile-cache <kBytes>
              Enables  caching  for  the  stream used by -audiofile, using the
              specified amount of memory.

       -reuse-socket (udp:// only)
              Allows a socket to be reused by other processes as soon as it is
              closed.

       -bandwidth <Bytes> (network only)
              Specify the maximum bandwidth for network streaming (for servers
              that are able to send content in different bitrates).  Useful if
              you  want to watch live streamed media behind a slow connection.
              With Real RTSP streaming, it is also used to set the maximum de‐
              livery  bandwidth allowing faster cache filling and stream dump‐
              ing.

       -bluray-angle <angle ID> (Blu-ray only)
              Some Blu-ray discs contain scenes that can be viewed from multi‐
              ple  angles.  Here you can tell MPlayer which angles to use (de‐
              fault: 1).

       -bluray-device <path to disc> (Blu-ray only)
              Specify the Blu-ray disc location.  Must  be  a  directory  with
              Blu-ray structure.

       -cache <kBytes>
              This  option  specifies  how much memory (in kBytes) to use when
              precaching a file or URL.  Especially useful on slow media.

       -nocache
              Turns off caching.

       -cache-min <percentage>
              Playback will start when the cache has been filled up  to  <per‐
              centage> of the total.

       -cache-seek-min <percentage>
              If a seek is to be made to a position within <percentage> of the
              cache size from the current position, MPlayer will wait for  the
              cache  to  be  filled  to this position rather than performing a
              stream seek (default: 50).

       -capture (MPlayer only)
              Allows capturing the primary stream (not additional audio tracks
              or  other  kind of streams) into the file specified by -dumpfile
              or by default.  If this option is given, capturing can be start‐
              ed  and  stopped by pressing the key bound to this function (see
              section INTERACTIVE CONTROL).  Same  as  for  -dumpstream,  this
              will  likely  not  produce usable results for anything else than
              MPEG streams.  Note that, due to cache latencies, captured  data
              may begin and end somewhat delayed compared to what you see dis‐
              played.

       -cdda <option1:option2> (CDDA only)
              This option can be used to tune the CD Audio reading feature  of
              MPlayer.

              Available options are:

                 speed=<value>
                      Set CD spin speed.

                 paranoia=<0-2>
                      Set  paranoia  level.  Values other than 0 seem to break
                      playback of anything but the first track.
                         0: disable checking (default)
                         1: overlap checking only
                         2: full data correction and verification

                 generic-dev=<value>
                      Use specified generic SCSI device.

                 sector-size=<value>
                      Set atomic read size.

                 overlap=<value>
                      Force minimum  overlap  search  during  verification  to
                      <value> sectors.

                 toc-bias
                      Assume  that the beginning offset of track 1 as reported
                      in the TOC will be addressed as  LBA  0.   Some  Toshiba
                      drives need this for getting track boundaries correct.

                 toc-offset=<value>
                      Add <value> sectors to the values reported when address‐
                      ing tracks.  May be negative.

                 (no)skip
                      (Never) accept imperfect data reconstruction.

       -cdrom-device <path to device>
              Specify the CD-ROM device (default: /dev/cdrom).

       -channels <number> (also see -af channels)
              Request the number of playback channels (default:  2).   MPlayer
              asks  the  decoder  to decode the audio into as many channels as
              specified.  Then it is up to the decoder to fulfill the require‐
              ment.   This  is usually only important when playing videos with
              AC-3 audio (like DVDs).  In that case liba52 does  the  decoding
              by  default and correctly downmixes the audio into the requested
              number of channels.  To directly control the  number  of  output
              channels independently of how many channels are decoded, use the
              channels filter.
              NOTE: This option is honored  by  codecs  (AC-3  only),  filters
              (surround) and audio output drivers (OSS at least).

              Available options are:

                 2    stereo
                 4    surround
                 6    full 5.1
                 8    full 7.1

       -chapter <chapter ID>[-<endchapter ID>]
              Specify  which  chapter to start playing at.  Optionally specify
              which chapter to end playing at (default: 1).

       -cookies (network only)
              Send cookies when making HTTP requests.

       -cookies-file <filename> (network only)
              Read HTTP cookies  from  <filename>  (default:  ~/.mozilla/  and
              ~/.netscape/) and skip reading from default locations.  The file
              is assumed to be in Netscape format.

       -delay <sec>
              audio delay in seconds (positive or negative float value)
              Negative values delay the audio, and positive values  delay  the
              video.  Note that this is the exact opposite of the -audio-delay
              MEncoder option.
              NOTE: When used with MEncoder, this is not  guaranteed  to  work
              correctly with -ovc copy; use -audio-delay instead.

       -ignore-start
              Ignore the specified starting time for streams in AVI files.  In
              MPlayer, this nullifies stream delays in files encoded with  the
              -audio-delay option.  During encoding, this option prevents MEn‐
              coder from transferring original stream start times to  the  new
              file;  the  -audio-delay option is not affected.  Note that MEn‐
              coder sometimes adjusts stream starting times  automatically  to
              compensate  for  anticipated decoding delays, so do not use this
              option for encoding without testing it first.

       -demuxer <[+]name>
              Force demuxer type.  Use a '+' before the name to force it, this
              will skip some checks!  Give the demuxer name as printed by -de‐
              muxer help.  For backward compatibility it also accepts the  de‐
              muxer ID as defined in libmpdemux/demuxer.h.

       -dumpaudio (MPlayer only)
              Dumps  raw compressed audio stream to ./stream.dump (useful with
              MPEG/AC-3, in most other cases the resulting file  will  not  be
              playable).  If you give more than one of -dumpaudio, -dumpvideo,
              -dumpstream on the command line only the last one will work.

       -dumpfile <filename> (MPlayer only)
              Specify which file MPlayer should dump to.  Should be  used  to‐
              gether with -dumpaudio / -dumpvideo / -dumpstream / -capture.

       -dumpstream (MPlayer only)
              Dumps the raw stream to ./stream.dump.  Useful when ripping from
              DVD or network.  If  you  give  more  than  one  of  -dumpaudio,
              -dumpvideo,  -dumpstream  on  the command line only the last one
              will work.

       -dumpvideo (MPlayer only)
              Dump raw compressed video stream to ./stream.dump (not very  us‐
              able).   If  you  give  more than one of -dumpaudio, -dumpvideo,
              -dumpstream on the command line only the last one will work.

       -dvbin <options> (DVB only)
              Pass the following parameters to the DVB input module, in  order
              to override the default ones:

                 card=<1-4>
                      Specifies using card number 1-4 (default: 1).
                 file=<filename>
                      Instructs  MPlayer to read the channels list from <file‐
                      name>.         Default        is        ~/.mplayer/chan‐
                      nels.conf.{sat,ter,cbl,atsc}  (based  on your card type)
                      or ~/.mplayer/channels.conf as a last resort.
                 timeout=<1-240>
                      Maximum number of seconds to wait when trying to tune  a
                      frequency before giving up (default: 30).

       -dvd-device <path to device> (DVD only)
              Specify  the  DVD  device  or .iso filename (default: /dev/dvd).
              You can also specify a directory that contains files  previously
              copied directly from a DVD (with e.g. vobcopy).

       -dvd-speed <factor or speed in KB/s> (DVD only)
              Try  to limit DVD speed (default: 0, no change).  DVD base speed
              is about 1350KB/s, so a 8x  drive  can  read  at  speeds  up  to
              10800KB/s.   Slower speeds make the drive more quiet, for watch‐
              ing DVDs 2700KB/s should be quiet and fast enough.  MPlayer  re‐
              sets the speed to the drive default value on close.  Values less
              than 100 mean multiples of 1350KB/s, i.e. -dvd-speed  8  selects
              10800KB/s.
              NOTE:  You  need  write  access  to the DVD device to change the
              speed.

       -dvdangle <angle ID> (DVD only)
              Some DVD discs contain scenes that can be viewed  from  multiple
              angles.  Here you can tell MPlayer which angles to use (default:
              1).

       -edl <filename>
              Enables edit decision list (EDL) actions during playback.  Video
              will be skipped over and audio will be muted and unmuted accord‐
              ing to the entries in the given file.   See  http://www.mplayer‐
              hq.hu/DOCS/HTML/en/edl.html for details on how to use this.

       -endpos <[[hh:]mm:]ss[.ms]|size[b|kb|mb]> (also see -ss and -sb)
              Stop at given time or byte position.
              NOTE:  Byte position may not be accurate, as it can only stop at
              a frame boundary.  When used in  conjunction  with  -ss  option,
              -endpos time will shift forward by seconds specified with -ss if
              not a byte position.  In addition it may not work well or not at
              all when used with any of the -dump options.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -endpos 56
                      Stop at 56 seconds.
                 -endpos 01:10:00
                      Stop at 1 hour 10 minutes.
                 -ss 10 -endpos 56
                      Stop at 1 minute 6 seconds.
                 mplayer -endpos 100mb
                      Stop playback after reading 100MB of the input file.
                 mencoder -endpos 100mb
                      Encode only 100 MB.

       -forceidx
              Force index rebuilding.  Useful for files with broken index (A/V
              desync, etc).  This will enable seeking in files  where  seeking
              was  not  possible.  You can fix the index permanently with MEn‐
              coder (see the documentation).
              NOTE: This option only works if the  underlying  media  supports
              seeking (i.e. not with stdin, pipe, etc).

       -fps <float value>
              Override video framerate.  Useful if the original value is wrong
              or missing.

       -frames <number>
              Play/convert only first <number> frames, then quit.

       -hr-mp3-seek (MP3 only)
              Hi-res MP3 seeking.  Enabled when playing from an  external  MP3
              file,  as we need to seek to the very exact position to keep A/V
              sync.  Can be slow especially when seeking  backwards  since  it
              has to rewind to the beginning to find an exact frame position.

       -http-header-fields <field1,field2>
              Set custom HTTP fields when accessing HTTP stream.

              EXAMPLE:
                      mplayer  -http-header-fields  'Field1:  value1','Field2:
                      value2' http://localhost:1234
                      Will generate HTTP request:
                         GET / HTTP/1.0
                         Host: localhost:1234
                         User-Agent: MPlayer
                         Icy-MetaData: 1
                         Field1: value1
                         Field2: value2
                         Connection: close

       -idx (also see -forceidx)
              Rebuilds index of files if no index was found, allowing seeking.
              Useful with broken/incomplete downloads, or badly created files.
              NOTE:  This  option  only works if the underlying media supports
              seeking (i.e. not with stdin, pipe, etc).

       -noidx Skip rebuilding index file.  MEncoder skips  writing  the  index
              with this option.

       -ipv4-only-proxy (network only)
              Skip  the  proxy  for IPv6 addresses.  It will still be used for
              IPv4 connections.

       -lavfstreamopts <options>
              Specify extra options for libavformat based streams.

       -loadidx <index file>
              The file from which to  read  the  video  index  data  saved  by
              -saveidx.   This  index will be used for seeking, overriding any
              index data contained in the AVI itself.  MPlayer will  not  pre‐
              vent  you  from loading an index file generated from a different
              AVI, but this is sure to cause unfavorable results.
              NOTE: This option is obsolete now that MPlayer has OpenDML  sup‐
              port.

       -mc <seconds/frame>
              maximum A-V sync correction per frame (in seconds)
              -mc  0 should always be combined with -noskip for mencoder, oth‐
              erwise it will almost certainly cause A-V desync.

       -mf <option1:option2:...>
              Used when decoding from multiple PNG or JPEG files.

              Available options are:

                 w=<value>
                      input file width (default: autodetect)
                 h=<value>
                      input file height (default: autodetect)
                 fps=<value>
                      output fps (default: 25)
                 type=<value>
                      input file type (available: jpeg, png, tga, sgi)

       -ni    Force treating files as non-interleaved.  In  particular  forces
              usage  of non-interleaved AVI parser (fixes playback of some bad
              AVI files).  Can also help playing files that otherwise play au‐
              dio and video alternating instead of at the same time.  This can
              significantly increase memory usage, thus it would be preferable
              to fix interleaving of affected files.

       -nobps (AVI only)
              Do  not  use average byte/second value for A-V sync.  Helps with
              some AVI files with broken header.

       -noextbased
              Disables extension-based demuxer selection.   By  default,  when
              the  file  type  (demuxer) cannot be detected reliably (the file
              has no header or it is not reliable enough), the filename exten‐
              sion  is  used to select the demuxer.  Always falls back on con‐
              tent-based demuxer selection.

       -passwd <password> (also see -user) (network only)
              Specify password for HTTP authentication.

       -prefer-ipv4 (network only)
              Use IPv4 on network connections.  Falls back on  IPv6  automati‐
              cally.

       -prefer-ipv6 (IPv6 network only)
              Use  IPv6  on network connections.  Falls back on IPv4 automati‐
              cally.

       -psprobe <byte position>
              When playing an MPEG-PS or MPEG-PES streams,  this  option  lets
              you  specify  how  many  bytes in the stream you want MPlayer to
              scan in order to identify the video codec used.  This option  is
              needed to play EVO or VDR files containing H.264 streams.

       -pvr <option1:option2:...> (PVR only)
              This option tunes various encoding properties of the PVR capture
              module.  It has to be used with any hardware MPEG encoder  based
              card   supported  by  the  V4L2  driver.   The  Hauppauge  WinTV
              PVR-150/250/350/500 and all IVTV based cards are  known  as  PVR
              capture cards.  Be aware that only Linux 2.6.18 kernel and above
              is able to handle MPEG stream through V4L2 layer.  For  hardware
              capture of an MPEG stream and watching it with MPlayer/MEncoder,
              use 'pvr://' as a movie URL.

              Available options are:

                 aspect=<0-3>
                      Specify input aspect ratio:
                         0: 1:1
                         1: 4:3 (default)
                         2: 16:9
                         3: 2.21:1

                 arate=<32000-48000>
                      Specify encoding audio rate (default: 48000  Hz,  avail‐
                      able: 32000, 44100 and 48000 Hz).

                 alayer=<1-5>
                      Specify MPEG audio layer encoding (default: 2).

                 abitrate=<32-448>
                      Specify audio encoding bitrate in kbps (default: 384).

                 amode=<value>
                      Specify  audio  encoding  mode.  Available preset values
                      are 'stereo', 'joint_stereo',  'dual'  and  'mono'  (de‐
                      fault: stereo).

                 vbitrate=<value>
                      Specify average video bitrate encoding in Mbps (default:
                      6).

                 vmode=<value>
                      Specify video encoding mode:
                         vbr: Variable BitRate (default)
                         cbr: Constant BitRate

                 vpeak=<value>
                      Specify peak video bitrate encoding in Mbps (only useful
                      for VBR encoding, default: 9.6).

                 fmt=<value>
                      Choose an MPEG format for encoding:
                         ps:    MPEG-2 Program Stream (default)
                         ts:    MPEG-2 Transport Stream
                         mpeg1: MPEG-1 System Stream
                         vcd:   Video CD compatible stream
                         svcd:  Super Video CD compatible stream
                         dvd:   DVD compatible stream

       -radio <option1:option2:...> (radio only)
              These  options  set various parameters of the radio capture mod‐
              ule.  For listening to radio with MPlayer use 'radio://<frequen‐
              cy>' (if channels option is not given) or 'radio://<channel_num‐
              ber>' (if channels option is given) as a movie URL.  You can see
              allowed  frequency range by running MPlayer with '-v'.  To start
              the grabbing subsystem, use 'radio://<frequency or channel>/cap‐
              ture'.   If  the  capture keyword is not given you can listen to
              radio using the line-in cable only.  Using capture to listen  is
              not  recommended  due  to  synchronization problems, which makes
              this process uncomfortable.

              Available options are:

                 device=<value>
                      Radio device to use (default: /dev/radio0 for Linux  and
                      /dev/tuner0 for *BSD).

                 driver=<value>
                      Radio  driver to use (default: v4l2 if available, other‐
                      wise v4l).  Currently, v4l and v4l2 drivers are support‐
                      ed.

                 volume=<0..100>
                      sound volume for radio device (default 100)

                 freq_min=<value> (*BSD BT848 only)
                      minimum allowed frequency (default: 87.50)

                 freq_max=<value> (*BSD BT848 only)
                      maximum allowed frequency (default: 108.00)

                 channels=<frequency>-<name>,<frequency>-<name>,...
                      Set  channel  list.   Use _ for spaces in names (or play
                      with quoting ;-).  The channel names will then be  writ‐
                      ten  using OSD and the slave commands radio_step_channel
                      and radio_set_channel will be usable for a  remote  con‐
                      trol  (see LIRC).  If given, number in movie URL will be
                      treated as channel position in channel list.
                      EXAMPLE: radio://1, radio://104.4, radio_set_channel 1

                 adevice=<value> (radio capture only)
                      Name of device to capture sound from.   Without  such  a
                      name  capture will be disabled, even if the capture key‐
                      word appears in the URL.  For ALSA devices use it in the
                      form  hw=<card>.<device>.  If the device name contains a
                      '=', the module will use ALSA to capture, otherwise OSS.

                 arate=<value> (radio capture only)
                      Rate in samples per second (default: 44100).
                      NOTE:  When  using  audio  capture  set  also  -rawaudio
                      rate=<value>  option  with  the same value as arate.  If
                      you have problems with sound speed (runs  too  quickly),
                      try   to   play   with   different   rate  values  (e.g.
                      48000,44100,32000,...).

                 achannels=<value> (radio capture only)
                      Number of audio channels to capture.

       -rawaudio <option1:option2:...>
              This option lets you play raw audio files.  You have to use -de‐
              muxer  rawaudio  as well.  It may also be used to play audio CDs
              which are not 44kHz 16-bit stereo.  For playing raw AC-3 streams
              use -rawaudio format=0x2000 -demuxer rawaudio.

              Available options are:

                 channels=<value>
                      number of channels
                 rate=<value>
                      rate in samples per second
                 samplesize=<value>
                      sample size in bytes
                 bitrate=<value>
                      bitrate for rawaudio files
                 format=<value>
                      fourcc in hex

       -rawvideo <option1:option2:...>
              This option lets you play raw video files.  You have to use -de‐
              muxer rawvideo as well.

              Available options are:

                 fps=<value>
                      rate in frames per second (default: 25.0)
                 sqcif|qcif|cif|4cif|pal|ntsc
                      set standard image size
                 w=<value>
                      image width in pixels
                 h=<value>
                      image height in pixels
                 i420|yv12|yuy2|y8
                      set colorspace
                 format=<value>
                      colorspace (fourcc) in  hex  or  string  constant.   Use
                      -rawvideo format=help for a list of possible strings.
                 size=<value>
                      frame size in Bytes

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer foreman.qcif -demuxer rawvideo -rawvideo qcif
                      Play the famous "foreman" sample video.
                 mplayer   sample-720x576.yuv   -demuxer   rawvideo  -rawvideo
                 w=720:h=576
                      Play a raw YUV sample.

       -referrer <string> (network only)
              Specify a referrer path or URL for HTTP requests.

       -rtsp-port
              Used with 'rtsp://' URLs to  force  the  client's  port  number.
              This option may be useful if you are behind a router and want to
              forward the RTSP stream from the server to a specific client.

       -rtsp-destination
              Used with 'rtsp://' URLs to force the destination IP address  to
              be bound.  This option may be useful with some RTSP server which
              do not send RTP packets to the right interface.  If the  connec‐
              tion  to  the  RTSP server fails, use -v to see which IP address
              MPlayer tries to bind to and try to force it to one assigned  to
              your computer instead.

       -rtsp-stream-over-tcp (LIVE555 and NEMESI only)
              Used  with 'rtsp://' URLs to specify that the resulting incoming
              RTP and RTCP packets be streamed over TCP (using  the  same  TCP
              connection  as  RTSP).   This option may be useful if you have a
              broken internet connection that does not pass incoming UDP pack‐
              ets (see http://www.live555.com/mplayer/).

       -rtsp-stream-over-http (LIVE555 only)
              Used  with 'http://' URLs to specify that the resulting incoming
              RTP and RTCP packets be streamed over HTTP.

       -saveidx <filename>
              Force index rebuilding and dump the index to  <filename>.   Cur‐
              rently this only works with AVI files.
              NOTE:  This option is obsolete now that MPlayer has OpenDML sup‐
              port.

       -sb <byte position> (also see -ss)
              Seek to byte position.  Useful for playback from  CD-ROM  images
              or VOB files with junk at the beginning.

       -speed <0.01-100>
              Slow down or speed up playback by the factor given as parameter.
              Not guaranteed to  work  correctly  with  -oac  copy.   Add  -af
              scaletempo to get past the 4x limit on playback.

       -srate <Hz>
              Select  the output sample rate to be used (of course sound cards
              have limits on this).  If the sample frequency selected is  dif‐
              ferent  from  that of the current media, the resample or lavcre‐
              sample audio filter will be inserted into the audio filter layer
              to compensate for the difference.  The type of resampling can be
              controlled by the -af-adv option.  The default  is  fast  resam‐
              pling that may cause distortion.

       -ss <time> (also see -sb)
              Seek  to given time position.  Use -ss nopts to disable seeking,
              -ss 0 has different behaviour.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -ss 56
                      Seeks to 56 seconds.
                 -ss 01:10:00
                      Seeks to 1 hour 10 min.

       -tskeepbroken
              Tells MPlayer not to discard TS packets reported  as  broken  in
              the stream.  Sometimes needed to play corrupted MPEG-TS files.

       -tsprobe <byte position>
              When playing an MPEG-TS stream, this option lets you specify how
              many bytes in the stream you want MPlayer to search for the  de‐
              sired audio and video IDs.

       -tsprog <1-65534>
              When playing an MPEG-TS stream, you can specify with this option
              which program (if present) you want to play.  Can be  used  with
              -vid and -aid.

       -tv <option1:option2:...> (TV/PVR only)
              This  option  tunes various properties of the TV capture module.
              For watching TV with MPlayer, use 'tv://' or 'tv://<channel_num‐
              ber>'  or  even  'tv://<channel_name>  (see  option channels for
              channel_name  below)  as  a  movie  URL.   You  can   also   use
              'tv:///<input_id>' to start watching a movie from a composite or
              S-Video input (see option input for details).

              Available options are:

                 noaudio
                      no sound

                 automute=<0-255> (v4l and v4l2 only)
                      If signal strength reported by device is less than  this
                      value, audio and video will be muted.  In most cases au‐
                      tomute=100 will be enough.  Default is 0 (automute  dis‐
                      abled).

                 driver=<value>
                      See  -tv  driver=help for a list of compiled-in TV input
                      drivers.  available: dummy,  v4l,  v4l2,  bsdbt848  (de‐
                      fault: autodetect)

                 device=<value>
                      Specify TV device (default: /dev/video0).  NOTE: For the
                      bsdbt848 driver you can provide both bktr and tuner  de‐
                      vice names separating them with a comma, tuner after bk‐
                      tr (e.g. -tv device=/dev/bktr1,/dev/tuner1).

                 input=<value>
                      Specify input (default: 0 (TV), see console  output  for
                      available inputs).

                 freq=<value>
                      Specify   the  frequency  to  set  the  tuner  to  (e.g.
                      511.250).  Not compatible with the channels parameter.

                 outfmt=<value>
                      Specify the output format of the  tuner  with  a  preset
                      value  supported  by the V4L driver (yv12, rgb32, rgb24,
                      rgb16, rgb15, uyvy, yuy2, i420) or an  arbitrary  format
                      given  as  hex value.  Try outfmt=help for a list of all
                      available formats.

                 width=<value>
                      output window width

                 height=<value>
                      output window height

                 fps=<value>
                      framerate at which to capture video (frames per second)

                 buffersize=<value>
                      maximum size of the capture  buffer  in  megabytes  (de‐
                      fault: dynamical)

                 norm=<value>
                      For  bsdbt848  and  v4l, PAL, SECAM, NTSC are available.
                      For v4l2, see the console  output  for  a  list  of  all
                      available norms, also see the normid option below.

                 normid=<value> (v4l2 only)
                      Sets  the  TV norm to the given numeric ID.  The TV norm
                      depends on the capture card.  See the console output for
                      a list of available TV norms.

                 channel=<value>
                      Set tuner to <value> channel.

                 chanlist=<value>
                      available:  argentina,  australia,  china-bcast, europe-
                      east, europe-west, france, ireland, italy,  japan-bcast,
                      japan-cable,  newzealand, russia, southafrica, us-bcast,
                      us-cable, us-cable-hrc

                 channels=<chan>-<name>[=<norm>],<chan>-<name>[=<norm>],...
                      Set names for channels.  NOTE: If <chan> is  an  integer
                      greater  than  1000, it will be treated as frequency (in
                      kHz) rather than channel name from frequency table.
                      Use _ for spaces in names (or  play  with  quoting  ;-).
                      The  channel  names  will then be written using OSD, and
                      the slave commands tv_step_channel,  tv_set_channel  and
                      tv_last_channel will be usable for a remote control (see
                      LIRC).  Not compatible with the frequency parameter.
                      NOTE: The channel number will then be  the  position  in
                      the 'channels' list, beginning with 1.
                      EXAMPLE:    tv://1,    tv://TV1,    tv_set_channel    1,
                      tv_set_channel TV1

                 [brightness|contrast|hue|saturation]=<-100-100>
                      Set the image equalizer on the card.

                 audiorate=<value>
                      Set input audio sample rate.

                 forceaudio
                      Capture audio even if there are no audio sources report‐
                      ed by v4l.

                 alsa
                      Capture from ALSA.

                 amode=<0-3>
                      Choose an audio mode:
                         0: mono
                         1: stereo
                         2: language 1
                         3: language 2

                 forcechan=<1-2>
                      By  default, the count of recorded audio channels is de‐
                      termined automatically by querying the audio  mode  from
                      the  TV  card.   This  option allows forcing stereo/mono
                      recording regardless of the amode option and the  values
                      returned  by  v4l.  This can be used for troubleshooting
                      when the TV card is unable to report the  current  audio
                      mode.

                 adevice=<value>
                      Set an audio device.  <value> should be /dev/xxx for OSS
                      and a hardware ID for ALSA.  You must replace any ':' by
                      a '.' in the hardware ID for ALSA.

                 audioid=<value>
                      Choose  an  audio  output of the capture card, if it has
                      more than one.

                 [volume|bass|treble|balance]=<0-65535> (v4l1)

                 [volume|bass|treble|balance]=<0-100> (v4l2)
                      These options set parameters of the mixer on  the  video
                      capture  card.   They  will have no effect, if your card
                      does not have one.  For v4l2 50 maps to the default val‐
                      ue of the control, as reported by the driver.

                 gain=<0-100> (v4l2)
                      Set  gain control for video devices (usually webcams) to
                      the desired value and switch off automatic  control.   A
                      value of 0 enables automatic control.  If this option is
                      omitted, gain control will not be modified.

                 immediatemode=<bool>
                      A value of 0 means capture and buffer  audio  and  video
                      together  (default for MEncoder).  A value of 1 (default
                      for MPlayer) means to do video capture only and let  the
                      audio  go  through  a loopback cable from the TV card to
                      the sound card.

                 mjpeg
                      Use hardware MJPEG compression  (if  the  card  supports
                      it).  When using this option, you do not need to specify
                      the width and  height  of  the  output  window,  because
                      MPlayer will determine it automatically from the decima‐
                      tion value (see below).

                 decimation=<1|2|4>
                      choose the size of the picture that will  be  compressed
                      by hardware MJPEG compression:
                         1: full size
                             704x576    PAL
                             704x480    NTSC
                         2: medium size
                             352x288    PAL
                             352x240    NTSC
                         4: small size
                             176x144    PAL
                             176x120    NTSC

                 quality=<0-100>
                      Choose  the quality of the JPEG compression (< 60 recom‐
                      mended for full size).

                 tdevice=<value>
                      Specify TV teletext  device  (example:  /dev/vbi0)  (de‐
                      fault: none).

                 tformat=<format>
                      Specify TV teletext display format (default: 0):
                         0: opaque
                         1: transparent
                         2: opaque with inverted colors
                         3: transparent with inverted colors

                 tpage=<100-899>
                      Specify initial TV teletext page number (default: 100).

                 tlang=<-1-127>
                      Specify  default  teletext  language  code (default: 0),
                      which will be used as primary language until a  type  28
                      packet is received.  Useful when the teletext system us‐
                      es a non-latin character set, but language codes are not
                      transmitted  via  teletext type 28 packets for some rea‐
                      son.  To see a list of supported language codes set this
                      option to -1.

                 hidden_video_renderer (dshow only)
                      Terminate  stream  with  video  renderer instead of Null
                      renderer (default: off).  Will help if video freezes but
                      audio does not.  NOTE: May not work with -vo directx and
                      -vf crop combination.

                 hidden_vp_renderer (dshow only)
                      Terminate VideoPort pin stream with video  renderer  in‐
                      stead  of  removing  it  from  the graph (default: off).
                      Useful if your card has a VideoPort  pin  and  video  is
                      choppy.   NOTE:  May  not  work with -vo directx and -vf
                      crop combination.

                 system_clock (dshow only)
                      Use the system clock as sync source instead of  the  de‐
                      fault  graph  clock  (usually  the clock from one of the
                      live sources in graph).

                 normalize_audio_chunks (dshow only)
                      Create audio chunks with a time length  equal  to  video
                      frame time length (default: off).  Some audio cards cre‐
                      ate audio chunks about 0.5s in size, resulting in choppy
                      video when using immediatemode=0.

       -tvscan <option1:option2:...> (TV and MPlayer only)
              Tune  the TV channel scanner.  MPlayer will also print value for
              "-tv channels=" option, including existing and just found  chan‐
              nels.

              Available suboptions are:

                 autostart
                      Begin  channel  scanning  immediately after startup (de‐
                      fault: disabled).

                 period=<0.1-2.0>
                      Specify delay in seconds before switching to next  chan‐
                      nel  (default:  0.5).   Lower  values  will cause faster
                      scanning, but can detect inactive TV channels as active.

                 threshold=<1-100>
                      Threshold value for the signal strength (in percent), as
                      reported by the device (default: 50).  A signal strength
                      higher than this value will indicate that the  currently
                      scanning channel is active.

       -user <username> (also see -passwd) (network only)
              Specify username for HTTP authentication.

       -user-agent <string>
              Use <string> as user agent for HTTP streaming.

       -vid <ID>
              Select  video channel (MPG: 0-15, ASF: 0-255, MPEG-TS: 17-8190).
              When playing an MPEG-TS stream, MPlayer/MEncoder  will  use  the
              first program (if present) with the chosen video stream.

       -vivo <suboption> (DEBUG CODE)
              Force  audio parameters for the VIVO demuxer (for debugging pur‐
              poses).  FIXME: Document this.

OSD/SUBTITLE OPTIONS
       NOTE: Also see -vf expand.

       -ass (FreeType only)
              Turn on SSA/ASS subtitle rendering.  With  this  option,  libass
              will be used for SSA/ASS external subtitles and Matroska tracks.
              You may also want to use -embeddedfonts.
              NOTE: Unlike normal OSD, libass uses fontconfig by  default.  To
              disable it, use -nofontconfig.

       -ass-border-color <value>
              Sets  the  border (outline) color for text subtitles.  The color
              format is RRGGBBAA.

       -ass-bottom-margin <value>
              Adds a black band at the bottom of the frame.  The SSA/ASS  ren‐
              derer can place subtitles there (with -ass-use-margins).

       -ass-color <value>
              Sets  the  color for text subtitles.  The color format is RRGGB‐
              BAA.

       -ass-font-scale <value>
              Set the scale coefficient to be used for fonts  in  the  SSA/ASS
              renderer.

       -ass-force-style <[Style.]Param=Value[,...]>
              Override some style or script info parameters.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -ass-force-style FontName=Arial,Default.Bold=1
                 -ass-force-style PlayResY=768

       -ass-hinting <type>
              Set hinting type.  <type> can be:
                 0    no hinting
                 1    FreeType autohinter, light mode
                 2    FreeType autohinter, normal mode
                 3    font native hinter
                 0-3 + 4
                      The  same, but hinting will only be performed if the OSD
                      is rendered at screen resolution and will therefore  not
                      be scaled.
                 The  default  value  is 7 (use native hinter for unscaled OSD
                 and no hinting otherwise).

       -ass-line-spacing <value>
              Set line spacing value for SSA/ASS renderer.

       -ass-styles <filename>
              Load all SSA/ASS styles found in the specified file and use them
              for rendering text subtitles.  The syntax of the file is exactly
              like the [V4 Styles] / [V4+ Styles] section of SSA/ASS.

       -ass-top-margin <value>
              Adds a black band at the top of the frame.  The SSA/ASS renderer
              can place toptitles there (with -ass-use-margins).

       -ass-use-margins
              Enables  placing  toptitles  and subtitles in black borders when
              they are available.

       -dumpjacosub (MPlayer only)
              Convert the given subtitle (specified with the -sub  option)  to
              the  time-based  JACOsub  subtitle format.  Creates a dumpsub.js
              file in the current directory.

       -dumpmicrodvdsub (MPlayer only)
              Convert the given subtitle (specified with the -sub  option)  to
              the MicroDVD subtitle format.  Creates a dumpsub.sub file in the
              current directory.

       -dumpmpsub (MPlayer only)
              Convert the given subtitle (specified with the -sub  option)  to
              MPlayer's  subtitle format, MPsub.  Creates a dump.mpsub file in
              the current directory.

       -dumpsami (MPlayer only)
              Convert the given subtitle (specified with the -sub  option)  to
              the time-based SAMI subtitle format.  Creates a dumpsub.smi file
              in the current directory.

       -dumpsrtsub (MPlayer only)
              Convert the given subtitle (specified with the -sub  option)  to
              the time-based SubViewer (SRT) subtitle format.  Creates a dump‐
              sub.srt file in the current directory.
              NOTE: Some broken hardware players choke on SRT  subtitle  files
              with  Unix line endings.  If you are unlucky enough to have such
              a box, pass your subtitle files through unix2dos  or  a  similar
              program  to replace Unix line endings with DOS/Windows line end‐
              ings.

       -dumpsub (MPlayer only) (BETA CODE)
              Dumps the subtitle substream from VOB  streams.   Also  see  the
              -dump*sub and -vobsubout* options.

       -embeddedfonts (FreeType only)
              Enables  extraction  of  Matroska  embedded fonts (default: dis‐
              abled).  These fonts can be used for SSA/ASS subtitle  rendering
              (-ass  option).   Font files are created in the ~/.mplayer/fonts
              directory.
              NOTE: With FontConfig 2.4.2 or newer, embedded fonts are  opened
              directly from memory, and this option is enabled by default.

       -ffactor <number>
              Resample the font alphamap.  Can be:
                 0    plain white fonts
                 0.75 very narrow black outline (default)
                 1    narrow black outline
                 10   bold black outline

       -flip-hebrew (FriBiDi only)
              Turns on flipping subtitles using FriBiDi.

       -noflip-hebrew-commas
              Change  FriBiDi's  assumptions about the placements of commas in
              subtitles.  Use this if commas in subtitles  are  shown  at  the
              start of a sentence instead of at the end.

       -font  <path  to  font.desc file, path to font (FreeType), font pattern
       (Fontconfig)>
              Search for the OSD/subtitle fonts in  an  alternative  directory
              (default  for  normal  fonts: ~/.mplayer/font/font.desc, default
              for FreeType fonts: ~/.mplayer/subfont.ttf, default for Fontcon‐
              fig: "sans-serif").
              NOTE: With FreeType, this option determines the path to the font
              file.  With Fontconfig, this option  determines  the  Fontconfig
              font pattern.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -font ~/.mplayer/arial-14/font.desc
                 -font ~/.mplayer/arialuni.ttf
                 -font 'Bitstream Vera Sans'
                 -font 'Bitstream Vera Sans:style=Bold'

       -fontconfig (fontconfig only)
              Enables  the usage of fontconfig managed fonts (default: autode‐
              tect).
              NOTE: By default fontconfig is used for  libass-rendered  subti‐
              tles  and not used for OSD. With -fontconfig it is used for both
              libass and OSD, with -nofontconfig it is not used at  all,  i.e.
              only  then  -font  and  -subfont  will work with a given path to
              font.

       -forcedsubsonly
              Display only forced subtitles for the DVD  subtitle  stream  se‐
              lected by e.g. -slang.

       -fribidi-charset <charset name> (FriBiDi only)
              Specifies  the character set that will be passed to FriBiDi when
              decoding non-UTF-8 subtitles (default: ISO8859-8).

       -ifo <VOBsub IFO file>
              Indicate the file that will be used to load  palette  and  frame
              size for VOBsub subtitles.

       -noautosub
              Turns  off automatic subtitle file loading.  Note: VOBsub subti‐
              tles are not affected.

       -osd-duration <time>
              Set the duration of the OSD messages in ms (default: 1000).

       -osd-fractions <0-2>
              Set how fractions of seconds of the current timestamp are print‐
              ed on the OSD:
                 0    Do not display fractions (default).
                 1    Show the first two decimals.
                 2    Show  approximated  frame  count  within current second.
                      This frame count is not accurate but only an  approxima‐
                      tion.   For  variable fps, the approximation is known to
                      be far off the correct frame count.

       -osdlevel <0-3> (MPlayer only)
              Specifies which mode the OSD should start in.
                 0    subtitles only
                 1    volume + seek (default)
                 2    volume + seek + timer + percentage
                 3    volume + seek + timer + percentage + total time

       -overlapsub
              Allows the next subtitle to be displayed while the  current  one
              is still visible (default is to enable the support only for spe‐
              cific formats).

       -progbar-align <0-100>
              Specify the vertical alignment of the progress bar (0: top, 100:
              bottom, default is 50, i.e. centered).

       -sid <ID> (also see -slang, -vobsubid)
              Display  the  subtitle stream specified by <ID> (0-31).  MPlayer
              prints the available subtitle IDs when run in verbose (-v) mode.
              If  you  cannot  select  one of the subtitles on a DVD, also try
              -vobsubid.

       -nosub Disables any otherwise auto-selected internal subtitles (as e.g.
              the  Matroska/mkv  demuxer supports).  Use -noautosub to disable
              the loading of external subtitle files.

       -slang <language code[,language code,...]> (also see -sid)
              Specify a priority list of subtitle languages to use.  Different
              container formats employ different language codes.  DVDs use ISO
              639-1 two letter language codes, Matroska uses ISO  639-2  three
              letter  language  codes  while  OGM uses a free-form identifier.
              MPlayer prints the available languages when run in verbose  (-v)
              mode.

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer dvd://1 -slang hu,en
                      Chooses  the Hungarian subtitle track on a DVD and falls
                      back on English if Hungarian is not available.
                 mplayer -slang jpn example.mkv
                      Plays a Matroska file with Japanese subtitles.

       -spuaa <mode>
              Antialiasing/scaling mode for DVD/VOBsub.  A value of 16 may  be
              added to <mode> in order to force scaling even when original and
              scaled frame size already match.  This can be employed  to  e.g.
              smooth subtitles with gaussian blur.  Available modes are:
                 0    none (fastest, very ugly)
                 1    approximate (broken?)
                 2    full (slow)
                 3    bilinear (default, fast and not too bad)
                 4    uses swscaler gaussian blur (looks very good)

       -spualign <-1-2>
              Specify how SPU (DVD/VOBsub) subtitles should be aligned.
                 -1   original position
                  0   Align at top (original behavior, default).
                  1   Align at center.
                  2   Align at bottom.

       -spugauss <0.0-3.0>
              Variance  parameter  of gaussian used by -spuaa 4.  Higher means
              more blur (default: 1.0).

       -sub <subtitlefile1,subtitlefile2,...>
              Use/display these subtitle files.  Only one  file  can  be  dis‐
              played at the same time.

       -sub-bg-alpha <0-255>
              Specify  the  alpha  channel  value  for subtitles and OSD back‐
              grounds.  Big values mean more transparency.  0 means completely
              transparent.

       -sub-bg-color <0-255>
              Specify the color value for subtitles and OSD backgrounds.  Cur‐
              rently subtitles are grayscale so this value  is  equivalent  to
              the intensity of the color.  255 means white and 0 black.

       -sub-demuxer <[+]name> (-subfile only) (BETA CODE)
              Force  subtitle demuxer type for -subfile.  Use a '+' before the
              name to force it, this will skip some checks!  Give the  demuxer
              name as printed by -sub-demuxer help.  For backward compatibili‐
              ty it also accepts the demuxer ID as defined in subreader.h.

       -sub-fuzziness <mode>
              Adjust matching fuzziness when searching for subtitles (does not
              apply to VOBsub):
                 0    exact match (default)
                 1    Load all subs containing movie name.
                 2    Load all subs in the current and -sub-paths directories.

       -sub-no-text-pp
              Disables any kind of text post processing done after loading the
              subtitles.  Used for debug purposes.

       -subalign <0-2>
              Specify which edge of the subtitles should  be  aligned  at  the
              height given by -subpos.
                 0    Align subtitle top edge (original behavior).
                 1    Align subtitle center.
                 2    Align subtitle bottom edge (default).

       -subcc <1-8>
              Display  DVD  Closed  Caption  (CC) subtitles from the specified
              channel.  Values 5 to 8 select a mode that can  extract  EIA-608
              compatibility  streams from EIA-708 data.  These are not the VOB
              subtitles, these are special ASCII subtitles for the hearing im‐
              paired encoded in the VOB userdata stream on most region 1 DVDs.
              CC subtitles have not been spotted on DVDs from other regions so
              far.

       -subcp <codepage> (iconv only)
              If  your  system  supports  iconv(3), you can use this option to
              specify the subtitle codepage. It takes priority over both -utf8
              and -unicode.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -subcp latin2
                 -subcp cp1250

       -subcp enca:<language>:<fallback codepage> (ENCA only)
              You  can  specify your language using a two letter language code
              to make ENCA detect the codepage automatically.  If unsure,  en‐
              ter  anything  and  watch  mplayer  -v output for available lan‐
              guages.  Use __ (two underscores) if your language is  not  sup‐
              ported.   Fallback  codepage specifies the codepage to use, when
              autodetection fails.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -subcp enca:cs:latin2
                      Guess the encoding, assuming the  subtitles  are  Czech,
                      fall back on latin 2, if the detection fails.
                 -subcp enca:pl:cp1250
                      Guess the encoding for Polish, fall back on cp1250.
                 -subcp enca:__:latin1
                      Generic detection (mostly unicode) with latin1 fallback.

       -sub-paths <path1,path2,...>
              Specify extra subtitle paths to track in the media directory.

              EXAMPLE:  Assuming  that  /path/to/movie/movie.avi is played and
              -sub-paths sub,subtitles,/tmp/subs is specified, MPlayer search‐
              es for subtitle files in these directories:
                 /path/to/movie/
                 /path/to/movie/sub/
                 /path/to/movie/subtitles/
                 /tmp/subs/
                 ~/.mplayer/sub/

       -subdelay <sec>
              Delays subtitles by <sec> seconds.  Can be negative.

       -subfile <filename> (BETA CODE)
              Currently useless.  Same as -audiofile, but for subtitle streams
              (OggDS?).

       -subfont <path to font (FreeType), font pattern (Fontconfig)> (FreeType
       only)
              Sets  the  subtitle  font (see -font).  If no -subfont is given,
              -font is used.

       -subfont-autoscale <0-3> (FreeType only)
              Sets the autoscale mode.
              NOTE: 0 means that text scale and OSD scale are font heights  in
              points.

              The mode can be:

                 0    no autoscale
                 1    proportional to movie height
                 2    proportional to movie width
                 3    proportional to movie diagonal (default)

       -subfont-blur <0-8> (FreeType only)
              Sets the font blur radius (default: 2).

       -subfont-encoding <value>
              Sets  the  font encoding.  When set to 'unicode', all the glyphs
              from the font file will be rendered and  unicode  will  be  used
              (default:  unicode).  (Without FreeType, setting any other value
              than  'unicode'  will  disable  unicode  glyphs  rendering   for
              font.desc  files.  With FreeType and for other values than 'uni‐
              code' your system has to support iconv(3) in order for  this  to
              work.)

       -subfont-osd-scale <0-100> (FreeType only)
              Sets the autoscale coefficient of the OSD elements (default: 6).

       -subfont-outline <0-8> (FreeType only)
              Sets the font outline thickness (default: 2).

       -subfont-text-scale <0-100> (FreeType only)
              Sets  the  subtitle  text autoscale coefficient as percentage of
              the screen size (default: 5).

       -subfps <rate>
              Specify the framerate of the subtitle file (default: movie fps).
              NOTE: <rate> > movie fps speeds the subtitles up for frame-based
              subtitle files and slows them down for time-based ones.

       -subpos <0-150> (useful with -vf expand)
              Specify  the  position of subtitles on the screen.  The value is
              the vertical position of the subtitle in % of the screen height.
              Values larger than 100 allow part of the subtitle to be cut off.

       -subwidth <10-100>
              Specify  the  maximum  width of subtitles on the screen.  Useful
              for TV-out.  The value is the width of the subtitle in % of  the
              screen width.

       -noterm-osd
              Disable the display of OSD messages on the console when no video
              output is available.

       -term-osd-esc <escape sequence>
              Specify the escape sequence to use before writing an OSD message
              on  the console.  The escape sequence should move the pointer to
              the beginning of the line used for the OSD  and  clear  it  (de‐
              fault: ^[[A\r^[[K).

       -unicode
              Tells  MPlayer  to handle the subtitle file as unicode. (It will
              only take effect if neither -subcp nor -utf8 is given.)

       -unrarexec <path to unrar executable> (not supported on MingW)
              Specify the path to the unrar executable so MPlayer can  use  it
              to  access rar-compressed VOBsub files (default: not set, so the
              feature is off).  The path must include the  executable's  file‐
              name, i.e. /usr/local/bin/unrar.

       -utf8
              Tells MPlayer to handle the subtitle file as UTF-8. (It will on‐
              ly take effect if -subcp isn't given, and it takes priority over
              -unicode.)

       -vobsub <VOBsub file without extension>
              Specify  a VOBsub file to use for subtitles.  Has to be the full
              pathname without extension, i.e. without the '.idx',  '.ifo'  or
              '.sub'.

       -vobsubid <0-31>
              Specify the VOBsub subtitle ID.

AUDIO OUTPUT OPTIONS (MPLAYER ONLY)
       -abs <value> (-ao oss only) (OBSOLETE)
              Override audio driver/card buffer size detection.

       -format <format> (also see the format audio filter)
              Select  the  sample format used for output from the audio filter
              layer to the sound card.  The values that <format> can adopt are
              listed below in the description of the format audio filter.

       -mixer <device>
              Use  a  mixer device different from the default /dev/mixer.  For
              ALSA this is the mixer name.

       -mixer-channel <mixer line>[,mixer index] (-ao oss and -ao alsa only)
              This option will tell MPlayer to use  a  different  channel  for
              controlling  volume  than  the default PCM.  Options for OSS in‐
              clude vol, pcm, line.  For a complete list of options  look  for
              SOUND_DEVICE_NAMES  in /usr/include/linux/soundcard.h.  For ALSA
              you can use the names  e.g.  alsamixer  displays,  like  Master,
              Line, PCM.
              NOTE:  ALSA  mixer  channel  names  followed by a number must be
              specified in the <name,number> format, i.e.  a  channel  labeled
              'PCM 1' in alsamixer must be converted to PCM,1.

       -softvol
              Force  the use of the software mixer, instead of using the sound
              card mixer.

       -softvol-max <10.0-10000.0>
              Set the maximum amplification level in percent  (default:  110).
              A value of 200 will allow you to adjust the volume up to a maxi‐
              mum of double the current level.  With values below 100 the ini‐
              tial  volume  (which  is  100%) will be above the maximum, which
              e.g. the OSD cannot display correctly.

       -volstep <0-100>
              Set the step size of mixer volume  changes  in  percent  of  the
              whole range (default: 3).

       -volume <-1-100> (also see -af volume)
              Set the startup volume in the mixer, either hardware or software
              (if used with -softvol).  A value of -1 (the default)  will  not
              change the volume.

AUDIO OUTPUT DRIVERS (MPLAYER ONLY)
       Audio  output  drivers are interfaces to different audio output facili‐
       ties.  The syntax is:

       -ao <driver1[:suboption1[=value]:...],driver2,...[,]>
              Specify a priority list of audio output drivers to be used.

       If the list has a trailing ',' MPlayer will fall back  on  drivers  not
       contained in the list.  Suboptions are optional and can mostly be omit‐
       ted.
       NOTE: See -ao help for a list of compiled-in audio output drivers.

       EXAMPLE:
                 -ao alsa,oss,
                      Try the ALSA driver, then the OSS driver, then others.
                 -ao alsa:noblock:device=hw=0.3
                      Sets noblock-mode and the  device-name  as  first  card,
                      fourth device.

       Available audio output drivers are:

       alsa
              ALSA 0.9/1.x audio output driver
                 noblock
                      Sets noblock-mode.
                 device=<device>
                      Sets  the device name.  Replace any ',' with '.' and any
                      ':' with '=' in the ALSA device name.  For hwac3  output
                      via  S/PDIF,  use  an "iec958" or "spdif" device, unless
                      you really know how to set it correctly.

       oss
              OSS audio output driver
                 <dsp-device>
                      Sets the audio output device (default: /dev/dsp).
                 <mixer-device>
                      Sets the audio mixer device (default: /dev/mixer).
                 <mixer-channel>
                      Sets the audio mixer channel (default: pcm).

       sdl (SDL only)
              highly platform independent SDL (Simple Directmedia  Layer)  li‐
              brary audio output driver
                 <driver>
                      Explicitly  choose the SDL audio driver to use (default:
                      let SDL choose).

       arts
              audio output through the aRts daemon

       esd
              audio output through the ESD daemon
                 <server>
                      Explicitly choose the ESD server to use (default: local‐
                      host).

       jack
              audio output through JACK (Jack Audio Connection Kit)
                 (no)connect
                      Automatically  create  connections  to output ports (de‐
                      fault: enabled).  When enabled, the  maximum  number  of
                      output  channels will be limited to the number of avail‐
                      able output ports.
                 port=<name>
                      Connects to the ports  with  the  given  name  (default:
                      physical ports).
                 name=<client
                      Client  name  that  is  passed to JACK (default: MPlayer
                      [<PID>]).  Useful if you want to  have  certain  connec‐
                      tions established automatically.
                 (no)estimate
                      Estimate  the  audio  delay,  supposed to make the video
                      playback smoother (default: enabled).
                 (no)autostart
                      Automatically start jackd if  necessary  (default:  dis‐
                      abled).   Note  that this seems unreliable and will spam
                      stdout with server messages.

       nas
              audio output through NAS

       coreaudio (Mac OS X only)
              native Mac OS X audio output driver
                 device_id=<id>
                      ID of output device to use (0 = default device)
                 help List all available output devices with their IDs.

       openal
              Experimental OpenAL audio output driver

       pulse
              PulseAudio audio output driver
                 [<host>[:<output sink>[:broken_pause]]]
                      Specify the host and optionally output sink to use.   An
                      empty <host> string uses a local connection, "localhost"
                      uses network transfer (most likely not what  you  want).
                      You  can also explicitly force the workaround for broken
                      pause functionality (default:  autodetected).   To  only
                      enable that without specifying a host/sink the syntax is
                      -ao pulse:::broken_pause

       sgi (SGI only)
              native SGI audio output driver
                 <output device name>
                      Explicitly choose the  output  device/interface  to  use
                      (default:  system-wide  default).   For example, 'Analog
                      Out' or 'Digital Out'.

       sun (Sun only)
              native Sun audio output driver
                 <device>
                      Explicitly choose the  audio  device  to  use  (default:
                      /dev/audio).

       win32 (Windows only)
              native Windows waveout audio output driver

       dsound (Windows only)
              DirectX DirectSound audio output driver
                 device=<devicenum>
                      Sets  the  device number to use.  Playing a file with -v
                      will show a list of available devices.

       kai (OS/2 only)
              OS/2 KAI audio output driver
                 uniaud
                      Force UNIAUD mode.
                 dart Force DART mode.
                 (no)share
                      Open audio in shareable or exclusive mode.
                 bufsize=<size>
                      Set buffer size to <size> in samples (default: 2048).

       dart (OS/2 only)
              OS/2 DART audio output driver
                 (no)share
                      Open DART in shareable or exclusive mode.
                 bufsize=<size>
                      Set buffer size to <size> in samples (default: 2048).

       dxr2 (also see -dxr2) (DXR2 only)
              Creative DXR2 specific output driver

       v4l2 (requires Linux 2.6.22+ kernel)
              Audio output driver for V4L2 cards with hardware MPEG decoder.

       mpegpes (DVB only)
              Audio output driver for DVB cards that writes the output  to  an
              MPEG-PES file if no DVB card is installed.
                 card=<1-4>
                      DVB  card  to  use if more than one card is present.  If
                      not specified MPlayer will search the first usable card.
                 file=<filename>
                      output filename

       null
              Produces no audio output but  maintains  video  playback  speed.
              Use -nosound for benchmarking.

       pcm
              raw PCM/wave file writer audio output
                 (no)waveheader
                      Include  or do not include the wave header (default: in‐
                      cluded).  When not included, raw PCM will be generated.
                 file=<filename>
                      Write the sound to <filename> instead of the default au‐
                      diodump.wav.   If nowaveheader is specified, the default
                      is audiodump.pcm.
                 fast
                      Try to dump faster than realtime.  Make sure the  output
                      does  not  get  truncated  (usually with "Too many video
                      packets in buffer" message).  It is normal that you  get
                      a "Your system is too SLOW to play this!" message.

       plugin
              plugin audio output driver

VIDEO OUTPUT OPTIONS (MPLAYER ONLY)
       -adapter <value>
              Set  the graphics card that will receive the image.  You can get
              a list of available cards when you  run  this  option  with  -v.
              Currently only works with the directx video output driver.

       -bpp <depth>
              Override  the  autodetected  color depth.  Only supported by the
              fbdev, dga, svga, vesa video output drivers.

       -border
              Play movie with window border and decorations.  Since this is on
              by default, use -noborder to disable the standard window decora‐
              tions.

       -brightness <-100-100>
              Adjust the brightness of the video  signal  (default:  0).   Not
              supported by all video output drivers.

       -contrast <-100-100>
              Adjust  the contrast of the video signal (default: 0).  Not sup‐
              ported by all video output drivers.

       -display <name> (X11 only)
              Specify the hostname and display number of the X server you want
              to display on.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -display xtest.localdomain:0

       -dr
              Turns on direct rendering (not supported by all codecs and video
              outputs).  This can result in significantly faster  blitting  on
              some  systems,  on most the difference will be minimal.  In some
              cases, particularly with decoders specifying  their  buffer  re‐
              quirements badly, it can be vastly slower.
              WARNING: May cause OSD/SUB corruption!

       -dxr2 <option1:option2:...>
              This option is used to control the dxr2 video output driver.

                 ar-mode=<value>
                      aspect  ratio  mode  (0  = normal, 1 = pan-and-scan, 2 =
                      letterbox (default))

                 iec958-encoded
                      Set iec958 output mode to encoded.

                 iec958-decoded
                      Set iec958 output mode to decoded (default).

                 macrovision=<value>
                      macrovision mode (0 = off (default), 1 = agc, 2 = agc  2
                      colorstripe, 3 = agc 4 colorstripe)

                 mute
                      mute sound output

                 unmute
                      unmute sound output

                 ucode=<value>
                      path to the microcode

              TV output

                 75ire
                      enable 7.5 IRE output mode

                 no75ire
                      disable 7.5 IRE output mode (default)

                 bw
                      b/w TV output

                 color
                      color TV output (default)

                 interlaced
                      interlaced TV output (default)

                 nointerlaced
                      disable interlaced TV output

                 norm=<value>
                      TV norm (ntsc (default), pal, pal60, palm, paln, palnc)

                 square-pixel
                      set pixel mode to square

                 ccir601-pixel
                      set pixel mode to ccir601

              overlay

                 cr-left=<0-500>
                      Set the left cropping value (default: 50).

                 cr-right=<0-500>
                      Set the right cropping value (default: 300).

                 cr-top=<0-500>
                      Set the top cropping value (default: 0).

                 cr-bottom=<0-500>
                      Set the bottom cropping value (default: 0).

                 ck-[r|g|b]=<0-255>
                      Set  the  r(ed),  g(reen)  or b(lue) gain of the overlay
                      color-key.

                 ck-[r|g|b]min=<0-255>
                      minimum value for the respective color key

                 ck-[r|g|b]max=<0-255>
                      maximum value for the respective color key

                 ignore-cache
                      Ignore cached overlay settings.

                 update-cache
                      Update cached overlay settings.

                 ol-osd
                      Enable overlay onscreen display.

                 nool-osd
                      Disable overlay onscreen display (default).

                 ol[h|w|x|y]-cor=<-20-20>
                      Adjust the overlay size (h,w) and position (x,y) in case
                      it does not match the window perfectly (default: 0).

                 overlay
                      Activate overlay (default).

                 nooverlay
                      Activate TV-out.

                 overlay-ratio=<1-2500>
                      Tune the overlay (default: 1000).

       -fbmode <modename> (-vo fbdev only)
              Change  video  mode  to the one that is labeled as <modename> in
              /etc/fb.modes.
              NOTE: VESA framebuffer does not support mode changing.

       -fbmodeconfig <filename> (-vo fbdev only)
              Override framebuffer mode  configuration  file  (default:  /etc/
              fb.modes).

       -fs (also see -zoom)
              Fullscreen  playback  (centers  movie,  and  paints  black bands
              around it).  Not supported by all video output drivers.

       -fsmode-dontuse <0-31> (OBSOLETE, use the -fs option)
              Try this option if you still experience fullscreen problems.

       -fstype <type1,type2,...> (X11 only)
              Specify a priority list of fullscreen modes to be used.  You can
              negate  the modes by prefixing them with '-'.  If you experience
              problems like the fullscreen window being covered by other  win‐
              dows try using a different order.
              NOTE: See -fstype help for a full list of available modes.

              The available types are:

                 above
                      Use the _NETWM_STATE_ABOVE hint if available.
                 below
                      Use the _NETWM_STATE_BELOW hint if available.
                 fullscreen
                      Use the _NETWM_STATE_FULLSCREEN hint if available.
                 layer
                      Use the _WIN_LAYER hint with the default layer.
                 layer=<0...15>
                      Use the _WIN_LAYER hint with the given layer number.
                 netwm
                      Force NETWM style.
                 none
                      Clear the list of modes; you can add modes to enable af‐
                      terward.
                 stays_on_top
                      Use _NETWM_STATE_STAYS_ON_TOP hint if available.

              EXAMPLE:
                 layer,stays_on_top,above,fullscreen
                      Default order, will be used as a fallback  if  incorrect
                      or unsupported modes are specified.
                 -fullscreen
                      Fixes fullscreen switching on OpenBox 1.x.

       -fs-border-left <pixels>

       -fs-border-right <pixels>

       -fs-border-top <pixels>

       -fs-border-bottom <pixels>
              Specify extra borders in full screen mode.  The borders apply to
              all displayed elements: video, OSD and EOSD.  The number of pix‐
              els  is specified in terms of screen resolution.  Currently only
              supported with by the gl video output driver.

       -gamma <-100-100>
              Adjust the gamma of the video signal (default: 0).  Not support‐
              ed by all video output drivers.

       -geometry x[%][:y[%]] or [WxH][+-x+-y]
              Adjust where the output is on the screen initially.  The x and y
              specifications are in pixels measured from the top-left  of  the
              screen  to the top-left of the image being displayed, however if
              a percentage sign is given after the argument it turns the value
              into a percentage of the screen size in that direction.  It also
              supports the standard X11 -geometry option format, in which e.g.
              +10-50 means "place 10 pixels from the left border and 50 pixels
              from the lower border" and "--20+-10" means "place 20 pixels be‐
              yond  the right and 10 pixels beyond the top border".  If an ex‐
              ternal window is specified using the -wid option, then the x and
              y  coordinates are relative to the top-left corner of the window
              rather than the screen.  The coordinates  are  relative  to  the
              screen given with -screen for the video output drivers that ful‐
              ly support -screen (direct3d,  gl,  gl_tiled,  vdpau,  x11,  xv,
              xvmc, corevideo).
              NOTE:  This option is only supported by the x11, xmga, xv, xvmc,
              xvidix, gl, gl_tiled, direct3d, directx, fbdev, sdl,  dfxfb  and
              corevideo video output drivers.

              EXAMPLE:
                 50:40
                      Places the window at x=50, y=40.
                 50%:50%
                      Places the window in the middle of the screen.
                 100%
                      Places the window at the middle of the right edge of the
                      screen.
                 100%:100%
                      Places the window at the  bottom  right  corner  of  the
                      screen.

       -gui-wid <window ID> (also see -wid) (GUI only)
              This tells the GUI to also use an X11 window and stick itself to
              the bottom of the video, which is useful to embed a mini-GUI  in
              a browser (with the MPlayer plugin for instance).

       -hue <-100-100>
              Adjust  the hue of the video signal (default: 0).  You can get a
              colored negative of the image with this option.   Not  supported
              by all video output drivers.

       -monitor-dotclock <range[,range,...]> (-vo fbdev and vesa only)
              Specify the dotclock or pixelclock range of the monitor.

       -monitor-hfreq <range[,range,...]> (-vo fbdev and vesa only)
              Specify the horizontal frequency range of the monitor.

       -monitor-vfreq <range[,range,...]> (-vo fbdev and vesa only)
              Specify the vertical frequency range of the monitor.

       -monitoraspect <ratio> (also see -aspect)
              Set the aspect ratio of your monitor or TV screen.  A value of 0
              disables a previous setting (e.g. in the  config  file).   Over‐
              rides the -monitorpixelaspect setting if enabled.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -monitoraspect 4:3  or 1.3333
                 -monitoraspect 16:9 or 1.7777

       -monitorpixelaspect <ratio> (also see -aspect)
              Set  the  aspect  of a single pixel of your monitor or TV screen
              (default: 1).  A value of 1 means  square  pixels  (correct  for
              (almost?) all LCDs).

       -name (X11 only)
              Set the window class name.

       -nodouble
              Disables  double buffering, mostly for debugging purposes.  Dou‐
              ble buffering fixes flicker by storing two frames in memory, and
              displaying  one while decoding another.  It can affect OSD nega‐
              tively, but often removes OSD flickering.

       -nograbpointer
              Do not grab the mouse pointer after a video mode  change  (-vm).
              Useful for multihead setups.

       -nokeepaspect
              Do  not  keep  window  aspect ratio when resizing windows.  Only
              works with the x11, xv, xmga, xvidix, directx video output driv‐
              ers.   Furthermore  under  X11  your window manager has to honor
              window aspect hints.

       -ontop
              Makes the player window stay on top of other windows.  Supported
              by  video  output  drivers which use X11, except SDL, as well as
              directx, corevideo, quartz, ggi and gl_tiled.

       -panscan <0.0-1.0>
              Enables pan-and-scan functionality (cropping the sides of e.g. a
              16:9  movie  to  make it fit a 4:3 display without black bands).
              The range controls how much of the image is cropped.  Only works
              with the directx, xv, xmga, mga, gl, gl_tiled, quartz, corevideo
              and xvidix video output drivers.
              NOTE: Values between -1 and 0 are allowed as  well,  but  highly
              experimental and may crash or worse.  Use at your own risk!

       -panscanrange <-19.0-99.0> (experimental)
              Change the range of the pan-and-scan functionality (default: 1).
              Positive values mean multiples of the default  range.   Negative
              numbers  mean you can zoom in up to a factor of -panscanrange+1.
              E.g. -panscanrange -3 allows a zoom factor of  up  to  4.   This
              feature is experimental.

       -border-pos-x  <0.0-1.0>  (-vo  gl,xv,xvmc,vdpau,direct3d only, default
       0.5)
              When black borders are added to adjust for aspect,  this  deter‐
              mines  where  they are placed.  0.0 places borders on the right,
              1.0 on the left.  Values outside the range 0.0 -  1.0  will  add
              extra  black borders on one side and remove part of the image on
              the other side.

       -border-pos-y <0.0-1.0> (-vo  gl,xv,xvmc,vdpau,direct3d  only,  default
       0.5)
              As -border-pos-x but for top/bottom borders.  0.0 places borders
              on the bottom, 1.0 on the top.

       -monitor-orientation <0-3> (experimental)
              Rotate display by 90, 180 or 270 degrees.  Rotates also the OSD,
              not  just  the  video image itself.  Currently only supported by
              the gl video output driver.  For all  other  video  outputs  -vf
              ass,expand=osd=1,rotate=n  can be used, in the future this might
              even happen automatically.

       -refreshrate <Hz>
              Set the monitor refreshrate in Hz.  Currently only supported  by
              -vo directx combined with the -vm option.

       -rootwin
              Play  movie  in  the  root window (desktop background).  Desktop
              background images may cover  the  movie  window,  though.   Only
              works  with the x11, xv, xmga, xvidix, quartz, corevideo and di‐
              rectx video output drivers.

       -saturation <-100-100>
              Adjust the saturation of the video signal (default: 0).  You can
              get  grayscale  output  with  this option.  Not supported by all
              video output drivers.

       -screenh <pixels>
              Specify the screen height for video output drivers which do  not
              know the screen resolution like fbdev, x11 and TV-out.

       -screenw <pixels>
              Specify  the  screen width for video output drivers which do not
              know the screen resolution like fbdev, x11 and TV-out.

       -(no)stop-xscreensaver (X11 only)
              Turns off xscreensaver at startup and turns it on again on  exit
              (default:  enabled).   If  your screensaver supports neither the
              XSS nor XResetScreenSaver API please use -heartbeat-cmd instead.

       -title (also see -use-filename-title)
              Set the window title.  Supported by X11-based video output driv‐
              ers.

       -use-filename-title (also see -title)
              Set the window title using the media filename, when not set with
              -title.  Supported by X11-based video output drivers.

       -vm
              Try to change to a different video mode.  Supported by the  dga,
              x11, xv, sdl and directx video output drivers.  If used with the
              directx video output driver the  -screenw,  -screenh,  -bpp  and
              -refreshrate options can be used to set the new display mode.

       -vsync
              Enables VBI for the vesa, dfbmga and svga video output drivers.

       -wid <window ID> (also see -gui-wid) (X11, OpenGL and DirectX only)
              This  tells  MPlayer to attach to an existing window.  Useful to
              embed MPlayer in a browser (e.g. the plugger  extension).   This
              option  fills  the given window completely, thus aspect scaling,
              panscan, etc are no longer handled by MPlayer but must  be  man‐
              aged by the application that created the window.

       -screen <-2-...> (alias for -xineramascreen)
              In  Xinerama  configurations  (i.e.  a single desktop that spans
              across multiple displays) this option tells MPlayer which screen
              to  display the movie on.  A value of -2 means fullscreen across
              the whole virtual display (in this case Xinerama information  is
              completely ignored), -1 means fullscreen on the display the win‐
              dow currently is on.  The initial position set via the -geometry
              option  is  relative to the specified screen.  Will usually only
              work with "-fstype -fullscreen" or "-fstype none".  This  option
              is  not suitable to only set the startup screen (because it will
              always display on the given screen in fullscreen mode),  -geome‐
              try  is  the  best that is available for that purpose currently.
              Supported by at least the direct3d, gl, gl_tiled,  x11,  xv  and
              corevideo video output drivers.

       -zrbw (-vo zr only)
              Display  in  black and white.  For optimal performance, this can
              be combined with '-lavdopts gray'.

       -zrcrop <[width]x[height]+[x offset]+[y offset]> (-vo zr only)
              Select a part of the input image  to  display,  multiple  occur‐
              rences of this option switch on cinerama mode.  In cinerama mode
              the movie is distributed over more than one TV  (or  beamer)  to
              create a larger image.  Options appearing after the n-th -zrcrop
              apply to the n-th MJPEG card, each card should at least  have  a
              -zrdev in addition to the -zrcrop.  For examples, see the output
              of -zrhelp and the Zr section of the documentation.

       -zrdev <device> (-vo zr only)
              Specify the device special file that belongs to your MJPEG card,
              by default the zr video output driver takes the first v4l device
              it can find.

       -zrfd (-vo zr only)
              Force  decimation:  Decimation,  as  specified  by  -zrhdec  and
              -zrvdec, only happens if the hardware scaler can stretch the im‐
              age to its original size.  Use this option to force decimation.

       -zrhdec <1|2|4> (-vo zr only)
              Horizontal decimation: Ask the driver to send only every 2nd  or
              4th  line/pixel of the input image to the MJPEG card and use the
              scaler of the MJPEG card to stretch the image  to  its  original
              size.

       -zrhelp (-vo zr only)
              Display  a  list of all -zr* options, their default values and a
              cinerama mode example.

       -zrnorm <norm> (-vo zr only)
              Specify the TV norm as PAL or NTSC (default: no change).

       -zrquality <1-20> (-vo zr only)
              A number from 1 (best) to 20 (worst) representing the  JPEG  en‐
              coding quality.

       -zrvdec <1|2|4> (-vo zr only)
              Vertical  decimation:  Ask  the driver to send only every 2nd or
              4th line/pixel of the input image to the MJPEG card and use  the
              scaler  of  the  MJPEG card to stretch the image to its original
              size.

       -zrxdoff <x display offset> (-vo zr only)
              If the movie is smaller than the TV screen, this  option  speci‐
              fies  the  x  offset from the upper-left corner of the TV screen
              (default: centered).

       -zrydoff <y display offset> (-vo zr only)
              If the movie is smaller than the TV screen, this  option  speci‐
              fies  the  y  offset from the upper-left corner of the TV screen
              (default: centered).

VIDEO OUTPUT DRIVERS (MPLAYER ONLY)
       Video output drivers are interfaces to different video  output  facili‐
       ties.  The syntax is:

       -vo <driver1[:suboption1[=value]:...],driver2,...[,]>
              Specify a priority list of video output drivers to be used.

       If  the  list  has a trailing ',' MPlayer will fall back on drivers not
       contained in the list.  Suboptions are optional and can mostly be omit‐
       ted.
       NOTE: See -vo help for a list of compiled-in video output drivers.

       EXAMPLE:
                 -vo xmga,xv,
                      Try the Matrox X11 driver, then the Xv driver, then oth‐
                      ers.
                 -vo directx:noaccel
                      Uses  the  DirectX  driver  with  acceleration  features
                      turned off.

       Available video output drivers are:

       xv (X11 only)
              Uses  the XVideo extension of XFree86 4.x to enable hardware ac‐
              celerated playback.  If you cannot use a hardware specific driv‐
              er,  this  is  probably  the best option.  For information about
              what colorkey is used and how it is drawn run  MPlayer  with  -v
              option and look out for the lines tagged with [xv common] at the
              beginning.
                 adaptor=<number>
                      Select a specific XVideo adaptor (check xvinfo results).
                 port=<number>
                      Select a specific XVideo port.
                 ck=<cur|use|set>
                      Select the source from which the colorkey is taken  (de‐
                      fault: cur).
                         cur  The  default takes the colorkey currently set in
                              Xv.
                         use  Use but do not set  the  colorkey  from  MPlayer
                              (use -colorkey option to change it).
                         set  Same as use but also sets the supplied colorkey.
                 ck-method=<man|bg|auto>
                      Sets the colorkey drawing method (default: man).
                         man  Draw  the  colorkey manually (reduces flicker in
                              some cases).
                         bg   Set the colorkey as window background.
                         auto Let Xv draw the colorkey.

       x11 (X11 only)
              Shared memory video output driver without hardware  acceleration
              that works whenever X11 is present.

       xover (X11 only)
              Adds  X11  support  to  all  overlay based video output drivers.
              Currently only supported by tdfx_vid.
                 <vo_driver>
                      Select the driver to use as source to overlay on top  of
                      X11.

       vdpau  (with  -vc ffmpeg2vdpau, ffwmv3vdpau, ffvc1vdpau, ffh264vdpau or
       ffodivxvdpau)
              Video output that uses VDPAU to decode video via hardware.  Also
              supports displaying of software-decoded video.
                 sharpen=<-1-1>
                      For positive values, apply a sharpening algorithm to the
                      video, for negative values  a  blurring  algorithm  (de‐
                      fault: 0).
                 denoise=<0-1>
                      Apply a noise reduction algorithm to the video (default:
                      0, no noise reduction).
                 deint=<0-4>
                      Select the deinterlacer (default: 0).  All modes > 0 re‐
                      spect -field-dominance.
                         0    no deinterlacing
                         1    Show only first field, similar to -vf field.
                         2    Bob deinterlacing, similar to -vf tfields=1.
                         3    motion  adaptive temporal deinterlacing May lead
                              to A/V desync with slow  video  hardware  and/or
                              high  resolution.  This is the default if "D" is
                              used to enable deinterlacing.
                         4    motion  adaptive  temporal  deinterlacing   with
                              edge-guided  spatial  interpolation  Needs  fast
                              video hardware.
                 chroma-deint
                      Makes temporal deinterlacers operate both  on  luma  and
                      chroma (default).  Use nochroma-deint to solely use luma
                      and speed up advanced deinterlacing.  Useful  with  slow
                      video memory.
                 pullup
                      Try to skip deinterlacing for progressive frames, useful
                      for watching telecined content, needs fast  video  hard‐
                      ware for high resolutions.  Only works with motion adap‐
                      tive temporal deinterlacing.
                 colorspace
                      Select the color space for YUV to  RGB  conversion.   In
                      general  BT.601  should  be used for standard definition
                      (SD) content and BT.709 for high  definition  (HD)  con‐
                      tent.   Using  incorrect color space results in slightly
                      under or over saturated and shifted colors.
                         0    Guess the color space based on video resolution.
                              Video  with width >= 1280 or height > 576 is as‐
                              sumed to be HD and BT.709 color  space  will  be
                              used.
                         1    Use ITU-R BT.601 color space (default).
                         2    Use ITU-R BT.709 color space.
                         3    Use SMPTE-240M color space.
                 hqscaling
                         0    Use default VDPAU scaling (default).
                         1-9  Apply  high quality VDPAU scaling (needs capable
                              hardware).
                 force-mixer
                      Forces the use of the VDPAU mixer, which implements  all
                      above  options  (default).   Use  noforce-mixer to allow
                      displaying BGRA colorspace.  (Disables all above options
                      and the hardware equalizer if image format BGRA is actu‐
                      ally used.)

       xvmc (X11 with FFmpeg MPEG-1/2 decoder only)
              Video output driver that uses the XvMC (X Video Motion Compensa‐
              tion) extension of XFree86 4.x to speed up MPEG-1/2 and VCR2 de‐
              coding.
                 adaptor=<number>
                      Select a specific XVideo adaptor (check xvinfo results).
                 port=<number>
                      Select a specific XVideo port.
                 (no)benchmark
                      Disables image display.  Necessary for proper benchmark‐
                      ing  of drivers that change image buffers on monitor re‐
                      trace only (nVidia).  Default is not  to  disable  image
                      display (nobenchmark).
                 (no)bobdeint
                      Very  simple  deinterlacer.   Might not look better than
                      -vf tfields=1, but it is the only deinterlacer for  xvmc
                      (default: nobobdeint).
                 (no)queue
                      Queue  frames for display to allow more parallel work of
                      the video hardware.  May add a  small  (not  noticeable)
                      constant A/V desync (default: noqueue).
                 (no)sleep
                      Use sleep function while waiting for rendering to finish
                      (not recommended on Linux) (default: nosleep).
                 ck=cur|use|set
                      Same as -vo xv:ck (see -vo xv).
                 ck-method=man|bg|auto
                      Same as -vo xv:ck-method (see -vo xv).

       dga (X11 only)
              Play video through the XFree86 Direct Graphics Access extension.
              Considered obsolete.

       sdl (SDL only, buggy/outdated)
              Highly  platform  independent SDL (Simple Directmedia Layer) li‐
              brary video output driver.  Since SDL uses its  own  X11  layer,
              MPlayer X11 options do not have any effect on SDL.  Note that it
              has several minor bugs (-vm/-novm is mostly ignored, -fs behaves
              like  -novm  should, window is in top-left corner when returning
              from fullscreen, panscan is not supported, ...).
                 driver=<driver>
                      Explicitly choose the SDL driver to use.
                 (no)forcexv
                      Use XVideo through the sdl video output driver (default:
                      forcexv).
                 (no)hwaccel
                      Use hardware accelerated scaler (default: hwaccel).

       vidix
              VIDIX  (VIDeo  Interface  for *niX) is an interface to the video
              acceleration features of different graphics  cards.   Very  fast
              video output driver on cards that support it.
                 <subdevice>
                      Explicitly  choose  the  VIDIX  subdevice driver to use.
                      Available  subdevice  drivers  are   cyberblade,   ivtv,
                      mach64,   mga_crtc2,  mga,  nvidia,  pm2,  pm3,  radeon,
                      rage128, s3, sh_veu, sis_vid and unichrome.

       xvidix (X11 only)
              X11 frontend for VIDIX
                 <subdevice>
                      same as vidix

       cvidix
              Generic and platform independent VIDIX frontend, can even run in
              a text console with nVidia cards.
                 <subdevice>
                      same as vidix

       winvidix (Windows only)
              Windows frontend for VIDIX
                 <subdevice>
                      same as vidix

       direct3d (Windows only) (BETA CODE!)
              Video output driver that uses the Direct3D interface (useful for
              Vista).

       directx (Windows only)
              Video output driver that uses the DirectX interface.
                 noaccel
                      Turns off hardware acceleration.  Try this option if you
                      have display problems.

       kva (OS/2 only)
              Video output driver that uses the libkva interface.
                 snap Force SNAP mode.
                 wo   Force WarpOverlay! mode.
                 dive Force DIVE mode.
                 (no)t23
                      Enable  or  disable  workaround for T23 laptop (default:
                      disabled).  Try to enable this option if your video card
                      supports upscaling only.

       quartz (Mac OS X only)
              Mac  OS X Quartz video output driver.  Under some circumstances,
              it might be more efficient to force a packed YUV output  format,
              with e.g. -vf format=yuy2.
                 device_id=<number>
                      Choose the display device to use in fullscreen.
                 fs_res=<width>:<height>
                      Specify  the  fullscreen resolution (useful on slow sys‐
                      tems).

       corevideo (Mac OS X 10.4 or 10.3.9 with QuickTime 7)
              Mac OS X CoreVideo video output driver
                 device_id=<number>
                      DEPRECATED, use -screen instead.  Choose the display de‐
                      vice to use for fullscreen or set it to -1 to always use
                      the same screen the video window is on  (default:  -1  -
                      auto).
                 shared_buffer
                      Write  output  to a shared memory buffer instead of dis‐
                      playing it and try to open an existing NSConnection  for
                      communication with a GUI.
                 buffer_name=<name>
                      Name  of the shared buffer created with shm_open as well
                      as the name of the NSConnection MPlayer will try to open
                      (default: "mplayerosx").  Setting buffer_name implicitly
                      enables shared_buffer.

       fbdev (Linux only)
              Uses the kernel framebuffer to play video.
                 <device>
                      Explicitly choose the fbdev device  name  to  use  (e.g.
                      /dev/fb0)  or the name of the VIDIX subdevice if the de‐
                      vice name starts with 'vidix' (e.g.  'vidixsis_vid'  for
                      the sis driver).

       fbdev2 (Linux only)
              Uses the kernel framebuffer to play video, alternative implemen‐
              tation.
                 <device>
                      Explicitly choose the fbdev device name to use (default:
                      /dev/fb0).

       vesa
              Very  general  video  output driver that should work on any VESA
              VBE 2.0 compatible card.
                 (no)dga
                      Turns DGA mode on or off (default: on).
                 neotv_pal
                      Activate the NeoMagic TV out and set it to PAL norm.
                 neotv_ntsc
                      Activate the NeoMagic TV out and set it to NTSC norm.
                 vidix
                      Use the VIDIX driver.
                 lvo:
                      Activate the Linux Video Overlay on top of VESA mode.

       svga
              Play video using the SVGA library.
                 <video mode>
                      Specify video mode to use.  The mode can be given  in  a
                      <width>x<height>x<colors> format, e.g. 640x480x16M or be
                      a graphics mode number, e.g. 84.
                 bbosd
                      Draw OSD into black bands below the movie (slower).
                 native
                      Use only native drawing functions.  This  avoids  direct
                      rendering, OSD and hardware acceleration.
                 retrace
                      Force  frame  switch  on  vertical retrace.  Usable only
                      with -double.  It has the same effect as the -vsync  op‐
                      tion.
                 sq
                      Try to select a video mode with square pixels.
                 vidix
                      Use svga with VIDIX.

       gl
              OpenGL  video output driver, simple version.  Video size must be
              smaller than the maximum texture size of your OpenGL implementa‐
              tion.   Intended  to work even with the most basic OpenGL imple‐
              mentations, but also makes use of newer extensions, which  allow
              support  for more colorspaces and direct rendering.  For optimal
              speed try adding the options
              -dr -noslices
              The code performs very few checks, so  if  a  feature  does  not
              work,  this  might  be  because  it  is  not  supported  by your
              card/OpenGL implementation even if you do not get any error mes‐
              sage.   Use  glxinfo  or a similar tool to display the supported
              OpenGL extensions.
                 backend=<n>
                      Select the backend/OpenGL  implementation  to  use  (de‐
                      fault: -1).
                         -1: Autoselect
                         0: Win32/WGL
                         1: X11/GLX
                         2: SDL
                         3: X11/EGL (highly experimental)
                         4: OSX/Cocoa
                         5: Android (very bad hack, only for testing)
                 (no)ati-hack
                      ATI  drivers  may  give  a corrupted image when PBOs are
                      used (when using -dr or force-pbo).  This  option  fixes
                      this, at the expense of using a bit more memory.
                 (no)force-pbo
                      Always  uses  PBOs to transfer textures even if this in‐
                      volves an extra copy.  Currently this gives a little ex‐
                      tra  speed with NVidia drivers and a lot more speed with
                      ATI drivers.  May need -noslices and the ati-hack subop‐
                      tion to work correctly.
                 (no)scaled-osd
                      Changes  the  way  the  OSD behaves when the size of the
                      window changes (default: disabled).   When  enabled  be‐
                      haves more like the other video output drivers, which is
                      better for fixed-size fonts.  Disabled looks much better
                      with  FreeType  fonts and uses the borders in fullscreen
                      mode.  Does not work correctly with ass  subtitles  (see
                      -ass),  you  can instead render them without OpenGL sup‐
                      port via -vf ass.
                 osdcolor=<0xAARRGGBB>
                      Color for OSD (default: 0x00ffffff, corresponds to  non-
                      transparent white).
                 rectangle=<0,1,2>
                      Select  usage  of rectangular textures which saves video
                      RAM, but often is slower (default: 0).
                         0: Use power-of-two textures (default).
                         1: Use the GL_ARB_texture_rectangle extension.
                         2: Use the GL_ARB_texture_non_power_of_two extension.
                         In  some  cases  only  supported in software and thus
                         very slow.
                 swapinterval=<n>
                      Minimum interval between two buffer  swaps,  counted  in
                      displayed  frames  (default: 1).  1 is equivalent to en‐
                      abling VSYNC, 0 to disabling VSYNC.  Values below 0 will
                      leave it at the system default.  This limits the framer‐
                      ate  to  (horizontal  refresh  rate  /   n).    Requires
                      GLX_SGI_swap_control   support   to   work.   With  some
                      (most/all?)   implementations   this   only   works   in
                      fullscreen mode.
                 ycbcr
                      Use  the  GL_APPLE_ycbcr_422 extension to convert YUV to
                      RGB.  Default is disabled if yuv= is specified, auto-de‐
                      tected otherwise.  Note that this will enable a few spe‐
                      cial settings to get into a special driver fast-path.
                 yuv=<n>
                      Select the type of YUV to RGB conversion.   The  default
                      is auto-detection deciding between values 0 and 2.
                         0:  Use  software  conversion.   Compatible  with all
                         OpenGL versions.  Provides brightness,  contrast  and
                         saturation control.
                         1:  Use register combiners.  This uses an nVidia-spe‐
                         cific extension (GL_NV_register_combiners).  At least
                         three  texture units are needed.  Provides saturation
                         and hue control.  This method is fast but inexact.
                         2: Use a fragment program using the POW  instruction.
                         Needs  the  GL_ARB_fragment_program  extension and at
                         least three texture units.  Provides brightness, con‐
                         trast,  saturation, hue and gamma control.  Gamma can
                         also be set independently for red,  green  and  blue.
                         Method 4 is usually faster.
                         3:  Same  as  2.   They  exist as distinct values for
                         legacy reasons, MPlayer now  inserts  the  extra  in‐
                         structions for gamma control on-demand.
                         4:  Use  a  fragment  program with additional lookup.
                         Needs the GL_ARB_fragment_program  extension  and  at
                         least  four texture units.  Provides brightness, con‐
                         trast, saturation, hue and gamma control.  Gamma  can
                         also be set independently for red, green and blue.
                         5:  Use  ATI-specific method (for older cards).  This
                         uses an ATI-specific extension (GL_ATI_fragment_shad‐
                         er  -  not  GL_ARB_fragment_shader!).  At least three
                         texture units are needed.   Provides  saturation  and
                         hue control.  This method is fast but inexact.
                         6:  Use  a  3D  texture  to do conversion via lookup.
                         Needs the GL_ARB_fragment_program  extension  and  at
                         least  four  texture units.  Extremely slow (software
                         emulation) on some (all?) ATI cards since it  uses  a
                         texture  with  border  pixels.   Provides brightness,
                         contrast, saturation, hue and gamma  control.   Gamma
                         can  also  be  set  independently  for red, green and
                         blue.  Speed depends more  on  GPU  memory  bandwidth
                         than other methods.
                 colorspace
                      Select the color space for YUV to RGB conversion.
                         0    Use  the  formula  used normally by MPlayer (de‐
                              fault).
                         1    Use ITU-R BT.601 color space.
                         2    Use ITU-R BT.709 color space.
                         3    Use SMPTE-240M color space.
                 levelconv=<n>
                      Select the brightness level conversion to  use  for  the
                      YUV to RGB conversion
                         0    Convert TV to PC levels (default).
                         1    Convert PC to TV levels.
                         2    Do not do any conversion.
                 lscale=<n>
                      Select  the  scaling function to use for luminance scal‐
                      ing.  Only valid for yuv modes 2, 3, 4 and 6.
                         0    Use simple linear filtering (default).
                         1    Use bicubic B-spline filtering (better quality).
                              Needs  one additional texture unit.  Older cards
                              will not be able to handle this  for  chroma  at
                              least in fullscreen mode.
                         2    Use  cubic  filtering in horizontal, linear fil‐
                              tering in vertical direction.  Works  on  a  few
                              more cards than method 1.
                         3    Same  as  1  but  does not use a lookup texture.
                              Might be faster on some cards.
                         4    Use experimental unsharp masking with  3x3  sup‐
                              port  and a default strength of 0.5 (see filter-
                              strength).
                         5    Use experimental unsharp masking with  5x5  sup‐
                              port  and a default strength of 0.5 (see filter-
                              strength).
                         64   Use nearest-neighbor scaling.
                 cscale=<n>
                      Select the scaling function to use for chrominance scal‐
                      ing.  For details see lscale.
                 filter-strength=<value>
                      Set  the  effect  strength for the lscale/cscale filters
                      that support it.
                 noise-strength=<value>
                      Set how much noise to add. 0 to disable  (default),  1.0
                      for level suitable for dithering to 6 bit.
                 stereo=<value>
                      Select a method for stereo display.  You may have to use
                      -aspect to fix the aspect value.  Add 32  to  swap  left
                      and  right  side.   Experimental, do not expect too much
                      from it.
                         0    normal 2D display
                         1    Convert side by side input  to  full-color  red-
                              cyan stereo.
                         2    Convert  side by side input to full-color green-
                              magenta stereo.
                         3    Convert  side  by  side  input  to  quadbuffered
                              stereo.   Only  supported  by  very  few  OpenGL
                              cards.
                         4    Mix left and right in a pixel pattern.   Pattern
                              is given by stipple option.
                 stipple=<bit
                      Lowest  16  bit  give  the  4x4 pattern to use (default:
                      0x0f0f).  Examples to try:  0x0f0f,  0xf0f0:  horizontal
                      lines;  0xaaaa,  0x5555: vertical lines; 0xa5a5, 0x5a5a:
                      checkerboard pattern

              The following options are only useful if writing your own  frag‐
              ment programs.

                 customprog=<filename>
                      Load  a  custom  fragment  program from <filename>.  See
                      TOOLS/edgedect.fp for an example.
                 customtex=<filename>
                      Load a custom  "gamma  ramp"  texture  from  <filename>.
                      This  can  be used in combination with yuv=4 or with the
                      customprog option.
                 (no)customtlin
                      If enabled (default) use GL_LINEAR interpolation, other‐
                      wise use GL_NEAREST for customtex texture.
                 (no)customtrect
                      If enabled, use texture_rectangle for customtex texture.
                      Default is disabled.
                 (no)mipmapgen
                      If enabled, mipmaps for the video are automatically gen‐
                      erated.  This should be useful together with the custom‐
                      prog and the TXB instruction to implement  blur  filters
                      with  a  large  radius.  For most OpenGL implementations
                      this is very slow for any non-RGB formats.   Default  is
                      disabled.

              Normally  there  is no reason to use the following options, they
              mostly exist for testing purposes.

                 (no)glfinish
                      Call glFinish() before swapping buffers.  Slower but  in
                      some cases more correct output (default: disabled).
                 (no)manyfmts
                      Enables  support  for  more  (RGB and BGR) color formats
                      (default: enabled).  Needs OpenGL version >= 1.2.
                 slice-height=<0-...>
                      Number of lines copied to texture in one piece (default:
                      0).  0 for whole image.
                      NOTE:  If  YUV  colorspace  is used (see yuv suboption),
                      special rules apply:
                         If the decoder uses slice rendering (see  -noslices),
                         this setting has no effect, the size of the slices as
                         provided by the decoder is used.
                         If the decoder does not use slice rendering, the  de‐
                         fault is 16.
                 (no)osd
                      Enable  or  disable support for OSD rendering via OpenGL
                      (default: enabled).  This option is for testing; to dis‐
                      able the OSD use -osdlevel 0 instead.
                 (no)aspect
                      Enable  or  disable aspect scaling and pan-and-scan sup‐
                      port  (default:  enabled).   Disabling  might   increase
                      speed.

       gl_tiled
              Variant  of  the  OpenGL  video  output driver.  Supports videos
              larger than the maximum texture size but lacks many of  the  ad‐
              vanced  features  and  optimizations of the gl driver and is un‐
              likely to be extended further.
                 (no)glfinish
                      same as gl (default: enabled)
                 yuv=<n>
                      Select the type of YUV to RGB  conversion.   If  set  to
                      anything  except  0 OSD will be disabled and brightness,
                      contrast and gamma setting is  only  available  via  the
                      global  X  server  settings.  Apart from this the values
                      have the same meaning as for -vo gl.

       matrixview
              OpenGL-based renderer creating a  Matrix-like  running-text  ef‐
              fect.
                 cols=<n>
                      Number  of  text columns to display.  Very low values (<
                      16) will probably fail due to scaler limitations.   Val‐
                      ues not divisible by 16 may cause issues as well.
                 rows=<n>
                      Number  of text rows to display.  Very low values (< 16)
                      will probably fail due to  scaler  limitations.   Values
                      not divisible by 16 may cause issues as well.

       null
              Produces no video output.  Useful for benchmarking.

       aa
              ASCII art video output driver that works on a text console.
              NOTE: The driver does not handle -aspect correctly.
              HINT:  You  probably  have  to specify -monitorpixelaspect.  Try
              'mplayer -vo aa -monitorpixelaspect 0.5'.

       caca
              Color ASCII art video output driver that works on  a  text  con‐
              sole.

       bl
              Video playback using the Blinkenlights UDP protocol.  This driv‐
              er is highly hardware specific.
                 <subdevice>
                      Explicitly choose the Blinkenlights subdevice driver  to
                      use.  It is something like arcade:host=localhost:2323 or
                      hdl:file=name1,file=name2.  You must  specify  a  subde‐
                      vice.

       ggi
              GGI graphics system video output driver
                 <driver>
                      Explicitly  choose  the  GGI driver to use.  Replace any
                      ',' that would appear in the driver string by a '.'.

       directfb
              Play video using the DirectFB library.
                 (no)input
                      Use the DirectFB instead of the  MPlayer  keyboard  code
                      (default: enabled).
                 buffermode=single|double|triple
                      Double  and  triple  buffering  give best results if you
                      want to avoid tearing issues.  Triple buffering is  more
                      efficient  than  double  buffering  as it does not block
                      MPlayer while waiting for the vertical retrace.   Single
                      buffering should be avoided (default: single).
                 fieldparity=top|bottom
                      Control the output order for interlaced frames (default:
                      disabled).  Valid values are top  =  top  fields  first,
                      bottom = bottom fields first.  This option does not have
                      any effect on progressive film material like  most  MPEG
                      movies  are.  You need to enable this option if you have
                      tearing issues or unsmooth motions  watching  interlaced
                      film material.
                 layer=N
                      Will  force  layer with ID N for playback (default: -1 -
                      auto).
                 dfbopts=<list>
                      Specify a parameter list for DirectFB.

       dfbmga
              Matrox G400/G450/G550 specific video output driver that uses the
              DirectFB  library to make use of special hardware features.  En‐
              ables CRTC2 (second head), displaying video independently of the
              first head.
                 (no)input
                      same as directfb (default: disabled)
                 buffermode=single|double|triple
                      same as directfb (default: triple)
                 fieldparity=top|bottom
                      same as directfb
                 (no)bes
                      Enable  the  use of the Matrox BES (backend scaler) (de‐
                      fault: disabled).  Gives very  good  results  concerning
                      speed  and  output  quality as interpolated picture pro‐
                      cessing is done in hardware.  Works only on the  primary
                      head.
                 (no)spic
                      Make  use of the Matrox sub picture layer to display the
                      OSD (default: enabled).
                 (no)crtc2
                      Turn on TV-out on the second  head  (default:  enabled).
                      The output quality is amazing as it is a full interlaced
                      picture with proper sync to every odd/even field.
                 tvnorm=pal|ntsc|auto
                      Will set the TV norm of the Matrox card without the need
                      for   modifying   /etc/directfbrc  (default:  disabled).
                      Valid norms are pal = PAL, ntsc = NTSC.  Special norm is
                      auto  (auto-adjust  using  PAL/NTSC)  because it decides
                      which norm to use by looking at  the  framerate  of  the
                      movie.

       mga (Linux only)
              Matrox  specific  video  output driver that makes use of the YUV
              back end scaler on Gxxx cards through a kernel module.   If  you
              have a Matrox card, this is the fastest option.
                 <device>
                      Explicitly  choose  the  Matrox  device name to use (de‐
                      fault: /dev/mga_vid).

       xmga (Linux, X11 only)
              The mga video output driver, running in an X11 window.
                 <device>
                      Explicitly choose the Matrox device  name  to  use  (de‐
                      fault: /dev/mga_vid).

       s3fb (Linux only) (also see -dr)
              S3 Virge specific video output driver.  This driver supports the
              card's YUV conversion and scaling, double buffering  and  direct
              rendering  features.  Use -vf format=yuy2 to get hardware-accel‐
              erated YUY2 rendering, which is much faster than  YV12  on  this
              card.
                 <device>
                      Explicitly choose the fbdev device name to use (default:
                      /dev/fb0).

       wii (Linux only)
              Nintendo Wii/GameCube specific video output driver.

       3dfx (Linux only)
              3dfx-specific video output driver that directly uses  the  hard‐
              ware on top of X11.  Only 16 bpp are supported.

       tdfxfb (Linux only)
              This driver employs the tdfxfb framebuffer driver to play movies
              with YUV acceleration on 3dfx cards.
                 <device>
                      Explicitly choose the fbdev device name to use (default:
                      /dev/fb0).

       tdfx_vid (Linux only)
              3dfx-specific video output driver that works in combination with
              the tdfx_vid kernel module.
                 <device>
                      Explicitly choose the device name to use (default: /dev/
                      tdfx_vid).

       dxr2 (also see -dxr2) (DXR2 only)
              Creative DXR2 specific video output driver.
                 <vo_driver>
                      Output video subdriver to use as overlay (x11, xv).

       dxr3 (DXR3 only)
              Sigma Designs em8300 MPEG decoder chip (Creative DXR3, Sigma De‐
              signs Hollywood Plus) specific video output  driver.   Also  see
              the lavc video filter.
                 overlay
                      Activates the overlay instead of TV-out.
                 prebuf
                      Turns on prebuffering.
                 sync
                      Will turn on the new sync-engine.
                 norm=<norm>
                      Specifies the TV norm.
                         0: Does not change current norm (default).
                         1: Auto-adjust using PAL/NTSC.
                         2: Auto-adjust using PAL/PAL-60.
                         3: PAL
                         4: PAL-60
                         5: NTSC
                 <0-3>
                      Specifies the device number to use if you have more than
                      one em8300 card.

       v4l2 (requires Linux 2.6.22+ kernel)
              Video output driver for V4L2 compliant cards with built-in hard‐
              ware MPEG decoder.  Also see the lavc video filter.
                 <device>
                      Explicitly  choose  the  MPEG decoder device name to use
                      (default: /dev/video16).
                 <output>
                      Explicitly choose the TV-out output to be used  for  the
                      video signal.

       mpegpes (DVB only)
              Video  output  driver for DVB cards that writes the output to an
              MPEG-PES file if no DVB card is installed.
                 card=<1-4>
                      Specifies the device number to use if you have more than
                      one  DVB  output card (V3 API only, such as 1.x.y series
                      drivers).  If not  specified  MPlayer  will  search  the
                      first usable card.
                 <filename>
                      output filename (default: ./grab.mpg)

       zr (also see -zr* and -zrhelp)
              Video  output  driver  for  a  number  of MJPEG capture/playback
              cards.

       zr2 (also see the zrmjpeg video filter)
              Video output driver  for  a  number  of  MJPEG  capture/playback
              cards, second generation.
                 dev=<device>
                      Specifies the video device to use.
                 norm=<PAL|NTSC|SECAM|auto>
                      Specifies the video norm to use (default: auto).
                 (no)prebuf
                      (De)Activate prebuffering, not yet supported.

       md5sum
              Calculate MD5 sums of each frame and write them to a file.  Sup‐
              ports RGB24 and YV12 colorspaces.  Useful for debugging.
                 outfile=<value>
                      Specify the output filename (default: ./md5sums).

       yuv4mpeg
              Transforms the video stream into a sequence of uncompressed  YUV
              4:2:0  images  and  stores it in a file (default: ./stream.yuv).
              The format is the same as the one  employed  by  mjpegtools,  so
              this  is useful if you want to process the video with the mjpeg‐
              tools suite.  It supports the YV12 format.  If your source  file
              has  a  different format and is interlaced, make sure to use -vf
              scale=::1 to ensure the conversion uses  interlaced  mode.   You
              can  combine  it  with the -fixed-vo option to concatenate files
              with the same dimensions and fps value.
                 interlaced
                      Write the output as interlaced frames, top field first.
                 interlaced_bf
                      Write the output  as  interlaced  frames,  bottom  field
                      first.
                 file=<filename>
                      Write  the  output  to <filename> instead of the default
                      stream.yuv.

              NOTE: If you do not specify any option the output is progressive
              (i.e. not interlaced).

       gif89a
              Output each frame into a single animated GIF file in the current
              directory.  It supports only RGB format with 24 bpp and the out‐
              put is converted to 256 colors.
                 <fps>
                      Float value to specify framerate (default: 5.0).
                 <output>
                      Specify the output filename (default: ./out.gif).

              NOTE:  You must specify the framerate before the filename or the
              framerate will be part of the filename.

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer video.nut -vo gif89a:fps=15:output=test.gif

       jpeg
              Output each frame into a JPEG file  in  the  current  directory.
              Each  file  takes  the frame number padded with leading zeros as
              name.
                 [no]progressive
                      Specify standard or progressive  JPEG  (default:  nopro‐
                      gressive).
                 [no]baseline
                      Specify use of baseline or not (default: baseline).
                 optimize=<0-100>
                      optimization factor (default: 100)
                 smooth=<0-100>
                      smooth factor (default: 0)
                 quality=<0-100>
                      quality factor (default: 75)
                 outdir=<dirname>
                      Specify  the  directory  to  save the JPEG files to (de‐
                      fault: ./).
                 subdirs=<prefix>
                      Create numbered subdirectories with the specified prefix
                      to save the files in instead of the current directory.
                 maxfiles=<value> (subdirs only)
                      Maximum  number  of  files to be saved per subdirectory.
                      Must be equal to or larger than 1 (default: 1000).

       pnm
              Output each frame into a PNM  file  in  the  current  directory.
              Each  file  takes  the frame number padded with leading zeros as
              name.  It supports PPM, PGM and PGMYUV files  in  both  raw  and
              ASCII mode.  Also see pnm(5), ppm(5) and pgm(5).
                 ppm
                      Write PPM files (default).
                 pgm
                      Write PGM files.
                 pgmyuv
                      Write  PGMYUV  files.   PGMYUV  is like PGM, but it also
                      contains the U and V plane, appended at  the  bottom  of
                      the picture.
                 raw
                      Write PNM files in raw mode (default).
                 ascii
                      Write PNM files in ASCII mode.
                 outdir=<dirname>
                      Specify the directory to save the PNM files to (default:
                      ./).
                 subdirs=<prefix>
                      Create numbered subdirectories with the specified prefix
                      to save the files in instead of the current directory.
                 maxfiles=<value> (subdirs only)
                      Maximum  number  of  files to be saved per subdirectory.
                      Must be equal to or larger than 1 (default: 1000).

       png
              Output each frame into a PNG  file  in  the  current  directory.
              Each  file  takes  the frame number padded with leading zeros as
              name.  24bpp RGB and BGR formats are supported.
                 z=<0-9>
                      Specifies the compression level.  0 is no compression, 9
                      is maximum compression.
                 outdir=<dirname>
                      Specify the directory to save the PNG files to (default:
                      ./).
                 prefix=<prefix>
                      Specify the prefix to be used for the PNG filenames (de‐
                      fault: no prefix).
                 alpha
                      Create  PNG  files  with  an  alpha  channel.  Note that
                      MPlayer in general does not support alpha, so this  will
                      only be useful in some rare cases.

       mng
              Output  video  into an animated MNG file using 24 bpp RGB images
              with lossless compression.
                 output=<filename>
                      Specify the output filename (default: out.mng).

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer video.mkv -vo mng:output=test.mng

       tga
              Output each frame into a Targa file in  the  current  directory.
              Each  file  takes  the frame number padded with leading zeros as
              name.  The purpose of this video output driver is to have a sim‐
              ple  lossless  image writer to use without any external library.
              It supports the BGR[A] color format, with 15,  24  and  32  bpp.
              You can force a particular format with the format video filter.

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer video.nut -vf format=bgr15 -vo tga

DECODING/FILTERING OPTIONS
       -ac <[-|+]codec1,[-|+]codec2,...[,]>
              Specify a priority list of audio codecs to be used, according to
              their codec name in codecs.conf.  Use a  '-'  before  the  codec
              name  to  omit it.  Use a '+' before the codec name to force it,
              this will likely crash!  If the list has a trailing ','  MPlayer
              will fall back on codecs not contained in the list.
              NOTE: See -ac help for a full list of available codecs.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -ac mp3acm
                      Force the l3codeca.acm MP3 codec.
                 -ac mad,
                      Try libmad first, then fall back on others.
                 -ac hwac3,a52,
                      Try  hardware AC-3 passthrough, software AC-3, then oth‐
                      ers.
                 -ac hwdts,
                      Try hardware DTS passthrough, then fall back on others.
                 -ac -ffmp3,
                      Skip FFmpeg's MP3 decoder.

       -af-adv <force=(0-7):list=(filters)> (also see -af)
              Specify advanced audio filter options:

                 force=<0-7>
                      Forces the insertion of audio filters to one of the fol‐
                      lowing:
                         0:  Use  completely  automatic filter insertion (cur‐
                         rently identical to 1).
                         1: Optimize for accuracy (default).
                         2: Optimize for speed.  Warning: Some features in the
                         audio filters may silently fail, and the sound quali‐
                         ty may drop.
                         3: Use no automatic insertion of filters and no opti‐
                         mization.   Warning:  It  may  be  possible  to crash
                         MPlayer using this setting.
                         4: Use automatic insertion of filters according to  0
                         above,  but use floating point processing when possi‐
                         ble.
                         5: Use automatic insertion of filters according to  1
                         above,  but use floating point processing when possi‐
                         ble.
                         6: Use automatic insertion of filters according to  2
                         above,  but use floating point processing when possi‐
                         ble.
                         7: Use no automatic insertion of filters according to
                         3  above, and use floating point processing when pos‐
                         sible.

                 list=<filters>
                      Same as -af.

       -afm <driver1,driver2,...>
              Specify a priority list of audio codec families to be used,  ac‐
              cording  to  their codec name in codecs.conf.  Falls back on the
              default codecs if none of the given codec families work.
              NOTE: See -afm help for a full list of available codec families.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -afm ffmpeg
                      Try FFmpeg's libavcodec codecs first.
                 -afm acm,dshow
                      Try Win32 codecs first.

       -aspect <ratio> (also see -zoom)
              Override movie aspect ratio, in case aspect information  is  in‐
              correct or missing in the file being played.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -aspect 4:3  or -aspect 1.3333
                 -aspect 16:9 or -aspect 1.7777

       -noaspect
              Disable automatic movie aspect ratio compensation.

       -field-dominance <-1-1>
              Set  first field for interlaced content.  Useful for deinterlac‐
              ers that double the framerate: -vf tfields=1, -vf  yadif=1,  -vo
              vdpau:deint and -vo xvmc:bobdeint.
                 -1   auto  (default):  If the decoder does not export the ap‐
                      propriate information, it falls back  to  0  (top  field
                      first).
                 0    top field first
                 1    bottom field first

       -flip
              Flip image upside-down.

       -lavdopts <option1:option2:...> (DEBUG CODE)
              Specify  libavcodec  decoding parameters.  Separate multiple op‐
              tions with a colon.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -lavdopts gray:skiploopfilter=all:skipframe=nonref

              Available options are:

                 bitexact
                      Only use bit-exact algorithms in all decoding steps (for
                      codec testing).

                 bug=<value>
                      Manually work around encoder bugs.
                         0: nothing
                         1: autodetect bugs (default)
                         2  (msmpeg4v3):  some  old  lavc  generated msmpeg4v3
                         files (no autodetection)
                         4 (mpeg4):  Xvid  interlacing  bug  (autodetected  if
                         fourcc==XVIX)
                         8 (mpeg4): UMP4 (autodetected if fourcc==UMP4)
                         16 (mpeg4): padding bug (autodetected)
                         32 (mpeg4): illegal vlc bug (autodetected per fourcc)
                         64  (mpeg4): Xvid and DivX qpel bug (autodetected per
                         fourcc/version)
                         128 (mpeg4):  old  standard  qpel  (autodetected  per
                         fourcc/version)
                         256 (mpeg4): another qpel bug (autodetected per four‐
                         cc/version)
                         512 (mpeg4): direct-qpel-blocksize bug  (autodetected
                         per fourcc/version)
                         1024  (mpeg4):  edge  padding  bug  (autodetected per
                         fourcc/version)

                 debug=<value>
                      Display debugging information.
                         0: disabled
                         1: picture info
                         2: rate control
                         4: bitstream
                         8: macroblock (MB) type
                         16: per-block quantization parameter (QP)
                         32: motion vector
                         0x0040: motion vector visualization (use -noslices)
                         0x0080: macroblock (MB) skip
                         0x0100: startcode
                         0x0200: PTS
                         0x0400: error resilience
                         0x0800: memory management control operations (H.264)
                         0x1000: bugs
                         0x2000: Visualize quantization parameter (QP),  lower
                         QP are tinted greener.
                         0x4000: Visualize block types.

                 ec=<value>
                      Set error concealment strategy.
                         1: Use strong deblock filter for damaged MBs.
                         2: iterative motion vector (MV) search (slow)
                         3: all (default)

                 er=<value>
                      Set error resilience strategy.
                         0: disabled
                         1: careful (Should work with broken encoders.)
                         2: normal (default) (Works with compliant encoders.)
                         3:  aggressive (More checks, but might cause problems
                         even for valid bitstreams.)
                         4: very aggressive

                 fast (MPEG-2, MPEG-4, and H.264 only)
                      Enable optimizations which do not comply to the specifi‐
                      cation  and  might potentially cause problems, like sim‐
                      pler dequantization, simpler motion compensation, assum‐
                      ing use of the default quantization matrix, assuming YUV
                      4:2:0 and skipping a few checks to detect  damaged  bit‐
                      streams.

                 gray
                      grayscale only decoding (a bit faster than with color)

                 idct=<0-99> (see -lavcopts)
                      For  best  decoding  quality use the same IDCT algorithm
                      for decoding and encoding.  This may come at a price  in
                      accuracy, though.

                 lowres=<number>[,<w>]
                      Decode at lower resolutions.  Low resolution decoding is
                      not supported by all codecs, and it will often result in
                      ugly artifacts.  This is not a bug, but a side effect of
                      not decoding at full resolution.
                         0: disabled
                         1: 1/2 resolution
                         2: 1/4 resolution
                         3: 1/8 resolution
                      If <w> is specified lowres decoding will be used only if
                      the width of the video is major than or equal to <w>.
                 o=<key>=<value>[,<key>=<value>[,...]]    Pass   AVOptions  to
                 libavcodec decoder.  Note, a patch to make  the  o=  unneeded
                 and  pass  all unknown options through the AVOption system is
                 welcome.  A full list of AVOptions can be found in the FFmpeg
                 manual.   Note  that  some options may conflict with MEncoder
                 options.

                      EXAMPLE:
                           o=debug=pict

                 sb=<number> (MPEG-2 only)
                      Skip the given number of macroblock rows at the bottom.

                 st=<number> (MPEG-2 only)
                      Skip the given number of macroblock rows at the top.

                 skiploopfilter=<skipvalue> (H.264 only)
                      Skips the loop filter (AKA deblocking) during H.264  de‐
                      coding.  Since the filtered frame is supposed to be used
                      as reference for decoding dependent frames  this  has  a
                      worse  effect  on  quality  than not doing deblocking on
                      e.g. MPEG-2 video.  But at least for high  bitrate  HDTV
                      this  provides  a  big  speedup  with no visible quality
                      loss.

                      <skipvalue> can be either one of the following:
                         none: Never skip.
                         default: Skip useless processing steps (e.g.  0  size
                         packets in AVI).
                         nonref: Skip frames that are not referenced (i.e. not
                         used for decoding  other  frames,  the  error  cannot
                         "build up").
                         bidir: Skip B-Frames.
                         nonkey: Skip all frames except keyframes.
                         all: Skip all frames.

                 skipidct=<skipvalue> (MPEG-1/2 only)
                      Skips  the IDCT step.  This degrades quality a lot of in
                      almost all cases (see skiploopfilter for available  skip
                      values).

                 skipframe=<skipvalue>
                      Skips  decoding  of frames completely.  Big speedup, but
                      jerky motion and sometimes bad artifacts (see  skiploop‐
                      filter for available skip values).

                 threads=<1-32>
                      Maximum  number  of  threads used for decoding.  Not all
                      decoders support threading  and  decoders  with  support
                      might  stay  below  the  provided limit at their choice.
                      (default: 1)


                 vismv=<value>
                      Visualize motion vectors.
                         0: disabled
                         1: Visualize forward predicted MVs of P-frames.
                         2: Visualize forward predicted MVs of B-frames.
                         4: Visualize backward predicted MVs of B-frames.

                 vstats
                      Prints  some  statistics  and  stores  them   in   ./vs‐
                      tats_*.log.

                 wait_keyframe
                      Wait  for a keyframe before displaying anything.  Avoids
                      broken frames at startup or after seeking with some for‐
                      mats.

       -noslices
              Disable  drawing  video by 16-pixel height slices/bands, instead
              draws the whole frame in a single run.  May be faster or slower,
              depending on video card and available cache.  It has effect only
              with libmpeg2 and libavcodec codecs.

       -nosound
              Do not play/encode sound.  Useful for benchmarking.

       -novideo
              Do not play/encode video.  In many cases this will not work, use
              -vc null -vo null instead.

       -pp <quality> (also see -vf pp)
              Set  the DLL postprocess level.  This option is no longer usable
              with -vf pp.  It only works with Win32 DirectShow DLLs with  in‐
              ternal  postprocessing  routines.  The valid range of -pp values
              varies by codec, it is mostly 0-6, where  0=disable,  6=slowest/
              best.

       -pphelp (also see -vf pp)
              Show a summary about the available postprocess filters and their
              usage.

       -ssf <mode>
              Specifies software scaler parameters.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -vf scale -ssf lgb=3.0
                 lgb=<0-100>
                      gaussian blur filter (luma)
                 cgb=<0-100>
                      gaussian blur filter (chroma)
                 ls=<-100-100>
                      sharpen filter (luma)
                 cs=<-100-100>
                      sharpen filter (chroma)
                 chs=<h>
                      chroma horizontal shifting
                 cvs=<v>
                      chroma vertical shifting

       -stereo <mode>
              Select type of MP2/MP3 stereo output.
                 0    stereo
                 1    left channel
                 2    right channel

       -sws <software scaler type> (also see -vf scale and -zoom)
              Specify the software scaler algorithm to be used with the  -zoom
              option.   This  affects video output drivers which lack hardware
              acceleration, e.g. x11.

              Available types are:

                 0    fast bilinear
                 1    bilinear
                 2    bicubic (good quality) (default)
                 3    experimental
                 4    nearest neighbor (bad quality)
                 5    area
                 6    luma bicubic / chroma bilinear
                 7    gauss
                 8    sincR
                 9    lanczos
                 10   natural bicubic spline

              NOTE: Some -sws options are tunable.   The  description  of  the
              scale video filter has further information.

       -swsopts <software scaler options>
              Specify advanced software scaler options provided by libswscale.
              Set to "help" to get a list of supported options.

       -vc <[-|+]codec1,[-|+]codec2,...[,]>
              Specify a priority list of video codecs to be used, according to
              their  codec  name  in  codecs.conf.  Use a '-' before the codec
              name to omit it.  Use a '+' before the codec name to  force  it,
              this  will likely crash!  If the list has a trailing ',' MPlayer
              will fall back on codecs not contained in the list.
              NOTE: See -vc help for a full list of available codecs.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -vc divx
                      Force Win32/VfW DivX codec, no fallback.
                 -vc -divxds,-divx,
                      Skip Win32 DivX codecs.
                 -vc ffmpeg12,mpeg12,
                      Try libavcodec's MPEG-1/2  codec,  then  libmpeg2,  then
                      others.

       -vfm <driver1,driver2,...>
              Specify  a priority list of video codec families to be used, ac‐
              cording to their names in codecs.conf.  Falls back  on  the  de‐
              fault codecs if none of the given codec families work.
              NOTE: See -vfm help for a full list of available codec families.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -vfm ffmpeg,dshow,vfw
                      Try the libavcodec, then Directshow, then VfW codecs and
                      fall back on others, if they do not work.
                 -vfm xanim
                      Try XAnim codecs first.

       -x <x> (also see -zoom) (MPlayer only)
              Scale image to width <x> (if software/hardware scaling is avail‐
              able).  Disables aspect calculations.

       -xvidopts <option1:option2:...>
              Specify additional parameters when decoding with Xvid.
              NOTE: Since libavcodec is faster than Xvid you might want to use
              the libavcodec postprocessing filter (-vf pp) and decoder  (-vfm
              ffmpeg) instead.

              Xvid's internal postprocessing filters:
                 deblock-chroma (also see -vf pp)
                      chroma deblock filter
                 deblock-luma (also see -vf pp)
                      luma deblock filter
                 dering-luma (also see -vf pp)
                      luma deringing filter
                 dering-chroma (also see -vf pp)
                      chroma deringing filter
                 filmeffect (also see -vf noise)
                      Adds  artificial  film grain to the video.  May increase
                      perceived quality, while lowering true quality.

              rendering methods:
                 dr2
                      Activate direct rendering method 2.
                 nodr2
                      Deactivate direct rendering method 2.

       -xy <value> (also see -zoom)
                 value<=8
                      Scale image by factor <value>.
                 value>8
                      Set width to value and calculate height to keep  correct
                      aspect ratio.

       -y <y> (also see -zoom) (MPlayer only)
              Scale  image  to  height  <y>  (if  software/hardware scaling is
              available).  Disables aspect calculations.

       -zoom
              Allow software scaling, where available.  This will allow  scal‐
              ing  with  output  drivers (like x11, fbdev) that do not support
              hardware scaling where MPlayer disables scaling by  default  for
              performance reasons.

AUDIO FILTERS
       Audio  filters allow you to modify the audio stream and its properties.
       The syntax is:

       -af <filter1[=parameter1:parameter2:...],filter2,...>
              Setup a chain of audio filters.

       NOTE: To get a full list of available audio filters, see -af help.

       Audio filters are managed in lists.  There are a few commands to manage
       the filter list.

       -af-add <filter1[,filter2,...]>
              Appends the filters given as arguments to the filter list.

       -af-pre <filter1[,filter2,...]>
              Prepends the filters given as arguments to the filter list.

       -af-del <index1[,index2,...]>
              Deletes  the  filters at the given indexes.  Index numbers start
              at 0, negative numbers address the end of the list  (-1  is  the
              last).

       -af-clr
              Completely empties the filter list.

       Available filters are:

       resample[=srate[:sloppy[:type]]]
              Changes the sample rate of the audio stream.  Can be used if you
              have a fixed frequency sound card or if you are  stuck  with  an
              old sound card that is only capable of max 44.1kHz.  This filter
              is automatically enabled if necessary.  It only supports  16-bit
              integer and float in native-endian format as input.
              NOTE: With MEncoder, you need to also use -srate <srate>.
                 <srate>
                      output sample frequency in Hz.  The valid range for this
                      parameter is 8000 to 192000.  If the  input  and  output
                      sample  frequency  are  the same or if this parameter is
                      omitted the filter is automatically  unloaded.   A  high
                      sample  frequency  normally  improves the audio quality,
                      especially when used in combination with other filters.
                 <sloppy>
                      Allow (1) or disallow (0) the output frequency to differ
                      slightly  from  the frequency given by <srate> (default:
                      1).  Can be used if the startup of the playback  is  ex‐
                      tremely slow.
                 <type>
                      Select which resampling method to use.
                         0: linear interpolation (fast, poor quality especial‐
                         ly when upsampling)
                         1: polyphase filterbank and integer processing
                         2: polyphase filterbank and floating point processing
                         (slow, best quality)

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer -af resample=44100:0:0
                      would set the output frequency of the resample filter to
                      44100Hz using exact output frequency scaling and  linear
                      interpolation.

       lavcresample[=srate[:length[:linear[:count[:cutoff]]]]]
              Changes  the  sample  rate  of  the  audio  stream to an integer
              <srate> in Hz.  It only supports the 16-bit  native-endian  for‐
              mat.
              NOTE: With MEncoder, you need to also use -srate <srate>.
                 <srate>
                      the output sample rate
                 <length>
                      length  of the filter with respect to the lower sampling
                      rate (default: 16)
                 <linear>
                      if 1 then filters will be linearly interpolated  between
                      polyphase entries
                 <count>
                      log2  of the number of polyphase entries (..., 10->1024,
                      11->2048, 12->4096, ...)  (default: 10->1024)
                 <cutoff>
                      cutoff frequency (0.0-1.0), default set  depending  upon
                      filter length

       lavcac3enc[=tospdif[:bitrate[:minchn]]]
              Encode  multi-channel audio to AC-3 at runtime using libavcodec.
              Supports 16-bit native-endian input format, maximum 6  channels.
              The  output is big-endian when outputting a raw AC-3 stream, na‐
              tive-endian when outputting to S/PDIF.  The output  sample  rate
              of  this  filter is same with the input sample rate.  When input
              sample rate is 48kHz, 44.1kHz, or 32kHz,  this  filter  directly
              use  it.   Otherwise a resampling filter is auto-inserted before
              this filter to make the input and output sample rate  be  48kHz.
              You need to specify '-channels N' to make the decoder decode au‐
              dio into N-channel, then the filter can encode the N-channel in‐
              put to AC-3.
                 <tospdif>
                      Output  raw  AC-3  stream  if zero or not set, output to
                      S/PDIF for passthrough when <tospdif> is set non-zero.
                 <bitrate>
                      The bitrate to encode the AC-3 stream.  Set it to either
                      384  or  384000  to get 384kbits.  Valid values: 32, 40,
                      48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256,
                                    320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640  Default  bi‐
                      trate  is  based  on  the input channel number: 1ch: 96,
                      2ch: 192,  3ch: 224,  4ch: 384,  5ch: 448,  6ch: 448
                 <minchn>
                      If the input channel number is less than  <minchn>,  the
                      filter will detach itself (default: 5).

       sweep[=speed]
              Produces a sine sweep.
                 <0.0-1.0>
                      Sine  function  delta,  use  very low values to hear the
                      sweep.

       sinesuppress[=freq:decay]
              Remove a sine at the specified frequency.  Useful to get rid  of
              the  50/60Hz  noise on low quality audio equipment.  It probably
              only works on mono input.
                 <freq>
                      The frequency of the sine which should  be  removed  (in
                      Hz) (default: 50)
                 <decay>
                      Controls  the  adaptivity  (a larger value will make the
                      filter adapt to amplitude and phase changes  quicker,  a
                      smaller value will make the adaptation slower) (default:
                      0.0001).  Reasonable values are around 0.001.

       bs2b[=option1:option2:...]
              Bauer stereophonic to  binaural  transformation  using  libbs2b.
              Improves  the headphone listening experience by making the sound
              similar to that from loudspeakers, allowing  each  ear  to  hear
              both  channels  and  taking into account the distance difference
              and the head shadowing effect.  It is applicable only to 2 chan‐
              nel audio.
                 fcut=<300-1000>
                      Set cut frequency in Hz.
                 feed=<10-150>
                      Set feed level for low frequencies in 0.1*dB.
                 profile=<value>
                      Several profiles are available for convenience:
                           default
                                will  be  used  if  nothing else was specified
                                (fcut=700, feed=45)
                           cmoy
                                Chu  Moy  circuit  implementation   (fcut=700,
                                feed=60)
                           jmeier
                                Jan  Meier  circuit  implementation (fcut=650,
                                feed=95)

              If fcut or feed options are specified together with  a  profile,
              they will be applied on top of the selected profile.

       hrtf[=flag]
              Head-related transfer function: Converts multichannel audio to 2
              channel output for headphones, preserving the spatiality of  the
              sound.

              Flag  Meaning
              m     matrix decoding of the rear channel
              s     2-channel matrix decoding
              0     no matrix decoding (default)

       equalizer=[g1:g2:g3:...:g10]
              10  octave band graphic equalizer, implemented using 10 IIR band
              pass filters.  This means that it works regardless of what  type
              of  audio  is being played back.  The center frequencies for the
              10 bands are:

              No. frequency
              0    31.25 Hz
              1    62.50 Hz
              2   125.00 Hz
              3   250.00 Hz
              4   500.00 Hz
              5    1.00 kHz
              6    2.00 kHz
              7    4.00 kHz
              8    8.00 kHz
              9   16.00 kHz

              If the sample rate of the sound being played is lower  than  the
              center  frequency  for  a frequency band, then that band will be
              disabled.  A known bug with this filter is that the characteris‐
              tics  for the uppermost band are not completely symmetric if the
              sample rate is close to the center frequency of that band.  This
              problem  can  be worked around by upsampling the sound using the
              resample filter before it reaches this filter.
                 <g1>:<g2>:<g3>:...:<g10>
                      floating point numbers representing the gain in  dB  for
                      each frequency band (-12-12)

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer -af equalizer=11:11:10:5:0:-12:0:5:12:12 media.avi
                      Would amplify the sound in the upper and lower frequency
                      region while canceling it almost completely around 1kHz.

       channels=nch[:nr:from1:to1:from2:to2:from3:to3:...]
              Can be used for adding,  removing,  routing  and  copying  audio
              channels.   If  only <nch> is given the default routing is used,
              it works as follows: If the number of output channels is  bigger
              than  the  number  of input channels empty channels are inserted
              (except mixing from mono to stereo, then the mono channel is re‐
              peated in both of the output channels).  If the number of output
              channels is smaller than the number of input  channels  the  ex‐
              ceeding channels are truncated.
                 <nch>
                      number of output channels (1-8)
                 <nr>
                      number of routes (1-8)
                 <from1:to1:from2:to2:from3:to3:...>
                      Pairs  of  numbers  between 0 and 7 that define where to
                      route each channel.

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer -af channels=4:4:0:1:1:0:2:2:3:3 media.avi
                      Would change the number of channels to 4 and  set  up  4
                      routes that swap channel 0 and channel 1 and leave chan‐
                      nel 2 and 3 intact.  Observe that  if  media  containing
                      two  channels  was  played  back, channels 2 and 3 would
                      contain silence but 0 and 1 would still be swapped.
                 mplayer -af channels=6:4:0:0:0:1:0:2:0:3 media.avi
                      Would change the number of channels to 6 and  set  up  4
                      routes  that copy channel 0 to channels 0 to 3.  Channel
                      4 and 5 will contain silence.

       format[=format] (also see -format)
              Convert between different sample formats.  Automatically enabled
              when needed by the sound card or another filter.
                 <format>
                      Sets  the  desired  format.   The general form is 'sbe',
                      where 's' denotes the sign (either 's' for signed or 'u'
                      for unsigned), 'b' denotes the number of bits per sample
                      (16, 24 or 32) and  'e'  denotes  the  endianness  ('le'
                      means  little-endian, 'be' big-endian and 'ne' the endi‐
                      anness of the computer MPlayer is  running  on).   Valid
                      values   (amongst  others)  are:  's16le',  'u32be'  and
                      'u24ne'.  Exceptions to this rule that  are  also  valid
                      format  specifiers:  u8,  s8, floatle, floatbe, floatne,
                      mulaw, alaw, mpeg2, ac3 and imaadpcm.

       volume[=v[:sc]]
              Implements software volume control.  Use this filter  with  cau‐
              tion since it can reduce the signal to noise ratio of the sound.
              In most cases it is best to set the level for the PCM  sound  to
              max,  leave this filter out and control the output level to your
              speakers with the master volume control of the mixer.   In  case
              your  sound  card  has  a digital PCM mixer instead of an analog
              one, and you hear distortion, use the MASTER mixer instead.   If
              there  is  an external amplifier connected to the computer (this
              is almost always the case), the noise level can be minimized  by
              adjusting  the master level and the volume knob on the amplifier
              until the hissing noise in the background is gone.
              This filter has a second feature: It measures the overall  maxi‐
              mum  sound  level  and prints out that level when MPlayer exits.
              This volume estimate can be used for setting the sound level  in
              MEncoder  such that the maximum dynamic range is utilized.  This
              feature currently only works with floating-point data, use  e.g.
              -af-adv force=5, or use -af stats.
              NOTE: This filter is not reentrant and can therefore only be en‐
              abled once for every audio stream.
                 <v>
                      Sets the desired gain in dB  for  all  channels  in  the
                      stream  from  -200dB  to  +60dB,  where -200dB mutes the
                      sound completely and +60dB equals a gain  of  1000  (de‐
                      fault: 0).
                 <sc>
                      Turns  soft  clipping  on (1) or off (0).  Soft-clipping
                      can make the sound more smooth if very high volume  lev‐
                      els  are  used.  Enable this option if the dynamic range
                      of the loudspeakers is very low.
                      WARNING: This feature creates distortion and  should  be
                      considered a last resort.

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer -af volume=10.1:0 media.avi
                      Would  amplify  the sound by 10.1dB and hard-clip if the
                      sound level is too high.

       pan=n[:L00:L01:L02:...L10:L11:L12:...Ln0:Ln1:Ln2:...]
              Mixes channels arbitrarily.  Basically a combination of the vol‐
              ume  and  the  channels filter that can be used to down-mix many
              channels to only a few, e.g. stereo to mono or vary the  "width"
              of  the  center speaker in a surround sound system.  This filter
              is hard to use, and will require some tinkering before  the  de‐
              sired result is obtained.  The number of options for this filter
              depends on the number of output channels.   An  example  how  to
              downmix  a six-channel file to two channels with this filter can
              be found in the examples section near the end.
                 <n>
                      number of output channels (1-8)
                 <Lij>
                      How much of input channel i is mixed into output channel
                      j  (0-1).  So in principle you first have n numbers say‐
                      ing what to do with the first input channel, then n num‐
                      bers  that  act on the second input channel etc.  If you
                      do not specify any numbers for some input channels, 0 is
                      assumed.

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer -af pan=1:0.5:0.5 media.avi
                      Would down-mix from stereo to mono.
                 mplayer -af pan=3:1:0:0.5:0:1:0.5 media.avi
                      Would give 3 channel output leaving channels 0 and 1 in‐
                      tact, and mix channels 0 and 1  into  output  channel  2
                      (which could be sent to a subwoofer for example).

       sub[=fc:ch]
              Adds  a  subwoofer  channel to the audio stream.  The audio data
              used for creating the subwoofer channel is  an  average  of  the
              sound  in  channel 0 and channel 1.  The resulting sound is then
              low-pass filtered by a 4th order Butterworth filter with  a  de‐
              fault  cutoff  frequency of 60Hz and added to a separate channel
              in the audio stream.
              Warning: Disable this filter when you are playing DVDs with Dol‐
              by  Digital  5.1  sound,  otherwise this filter will disrupt the
              sound to the subwoofer.
                 <fc>
                      cutoff frequency in Hz for the low-pass filter (20Hz  to
                      300Hz)  (default:  60Hz) For the best result try setting
                      the cutoff frequency as low as possible.  This will  im‐
                      prove the stereo or surround sound experience.
                 <ch>
                      Determines  the  channel  number  in which to insert the
                      sub-channel audio.  Channel number can be between 0  and
                      7  (default:  5).   Observe  that the number of channels
                      will automatically be increased to <ch> if necessary.

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer -af sub=100:4 -channels 5 media.avi
                      Would add a sub-woofer channel with a  cutoff  frequency
                      of 100Hz to output channel 4.

       center
              Creates a center channel from the front channels.  May currently
              be low quality as it does not implement a high-pass  filter  for
              proper  extraction yet, but averages and halves the channels in‐
              stead.
                 <ch>
                      Determines the channel number in  which  to  insert  the
                      center  channel.   Channel number can be between 0 and 7
                      (default: 5).  Observe that the number of channels  will
                      automatically be increased to <ch> if necessary.

       surround[=delay]
              Decoder  for  matrix encoded surround sound like Dolby Surround.
              Many files with 2 channel audio actually contain  matrixed  sur‐
              round  sound.  Requires a sound card supporting at least 4 chan‐
              nels.
                 <delay>
                      delay time in ms for the rear speakers (0 to 1000)  (de‐
                      fault: 20) This delay should be set as follows: If d1 is
                      the distance from the listening position  to  the  front
                      speakers and d2 is the distance from the listening posi‐
                      tion to the rear speakers, then the delay should be  set
                      to 15ms if d1 <= d2 and to 15 + 5*(d1-d2) if d1 > d2.

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer -af surround=15 -channels 4 media.avi
                      Would  add  surround  sound decoding with 15ms delay for
                      the sound to the rear speakers.

       delay[=ch1:ch2:...]
              Delays the sound to the loudspeakers such that  the  sound  from
              the  different channels arrives at the listening position simul‐
              taneously.  It is only useful if you have more than 2 loudspeak‐
              ers.
                 ch1,ch2,...
                      The  delay  in ms that should be imposed on each channel
                      (floating point number between 0 and 1000).

              To calculate the required delay for the different channels do as
              follows:

              1. Measure  the  distance to the loudspeakers in meters in rela‐
                 tion to your listening position, giving you the distances  s1
                 to  s5 (for a 5.1 system).  There is no point in compensating
                 for the subwoofer (you will not hear the difference anyway).

              2. Subtract the distances s1 to s5 from  the  maximum  distance,
                 i.e. s[i] = max(s) - s[i]; i = 1...5.

              3. Calculate  the required delays in ms as d[i] = 1000*s[i]/342;
                 i = 1...5.

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer -af delay=10.5:10.5:0:0:7:0 media.avi
                      Would delay front left and right by 10.5ms, the two rear
                      channels  and  the  sub by 0ms and the center channel by
                      7ms.

       export[=mmapped_file[:nsamples]]
              Exports the incoming signal to other processes using memory map‐
              ping (mmap()).  Memory mapped areas contain a header:

              int nch                      /*number of channels*/
              int size                     /*buffer size*/
              unsigned long long counter   /*Used to keep sync, updated every
                                             time new data is exported.*/

              The rest is payload (non-interleaved) 16 bit data.
                 <mmapped_file>
                      file  to map data to (default: ~/.mplayer/mplayer-af_ex‐
                      port)
                 <nsamples>
                      number of samples per channel (default: 512)

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer -af export=/tmp/mplayer-af_export:1024 media.avi
                      Would export 1024 samples per channel to  '/tmp/mplayer-
                      af_export'.

       extrastereo[=mul]
              (Linearly) increases the difference between left and right chan‐
              nels which adds some sort of "live" effect to playback.
                 <mul>
                      Sets the difference  coefficient  (default:  2.5).   0.0
                      means  mono  sound  (average of both channels), with 1.0
                      sound will be unchanged, with -1.0 left and right  chan‐
                      nels will be swapped.

       volnorm[=method:target]
              Maximizes the volume without distorting the sound.
                 <method>
                      Sets the used method.
                         1:  Use  a single sample to smooth the variations via
                         the standard weighted mean  over  past  samples  (de‐
                         fault).
                         2:  Use  several samples to smooth the variations via
                         the standard weighted mean over past samples.

                 <target>
                      Sets the target amplitude as a fraction of  the  maximum
                      for the sample type (default: 0.25).

       ladspa=file:label[:controls...]
              Load  a LADSPA (Linux Audio Developer's Simple Plugin API) plug‐
              in.  This filter is reentrant, so multiple LADSPA plugins can be
              used at once.
                 <file>
                      Specifies   the   LADSPA   plugin   library   file.   If
                      LADSPA_PATH is set, it searches for the specified  file.
                      If  it  is  not  set,  you must supply a fully specified
                      pathname.
                 <label>
                      Specifies the filter within the library.  Some libraries
                      contain  only  one  filter,  but  others contain many of
                      them.  Entering 'help' here,  will  list  all  available
                      filters  within  the specified library, which eliminates
                      the use of 'listplugins' from the LADSPA SDK.
                 <controls>
                      Controls are zero or more floating point values that de‐
                      termine  the  behavior of the loaded plugin (for example
                      delay, threshold or gain).  In verbose mode (add  -v  to
                      the  MPlayer  command  line), all available controls and
                      their valid ranges are printed.  This eliminates the use
                      of 'analyseplugin' from the LADSPA SDK.

       comp
              Compressor/expander  filter  usable  for microphone input.  Pre‐
              vents artifacts on very loud sound and raises the volume on very
              low sound.  This filter is untested, maybe even unusable.

       gate
              Noise gate filter similar to the comp audio filter.  This filter
              is untested, maybe even unusable.

       karaoke
              Simple voice removal filter exploiting the fact  that  voice  is
              usually  recorded  with  mono gear and later 'center' mixed onto
              the final audio stream.  Beware that this filter will turn  your
              signal into mono.  Works well for 2 channel tracks; do not both‐
              er trying it on anything but 2 channel stereo.

       scaletempo[=option1:option2:...]
              Scales audio tempo without altering pitch, optionally synced  to
              playback speed (default).
              This  works by playing ´stride´ ms of audio at normal speed then
              consuming ´stride*scale´ ms  of  input  audio.   It  pieces  the
              strides  together  by  blending  ´overlap´% of stride with audio
              following the previous stride.  It optionally performs  a  short
              statistical  analysis on the next ´search´ ms of audio to deter‐
              mine the best overlap position.
                 scale=<amount>
                      Nominal amount to scale tempo.  Scales  this  amount  in
                      addition to speed.  (default: 1.0)
                 stride=<amount>
                      Length  in milliseconds to output each stride.  Too high
                      of value will  cause  noticeable  skips  at  high  scale
                      amounts and an echo at low scale amounts.  Very low val‐
                      ues will alter pitch.  Increasing improves  performance.
                      (default: 60)
                 overlap=<percent>
                      Percentage  of  stride  to overlap.  Decreasing improves
                      performance.  (default: .20)
                 search=<amount>
                      Length in milliseconds to search for best overlap  posi‐
                      tion.  Decreasing improves performance greatly.  On slow
                      systems, you will probably want to set  this  very  low.
                      (default: 14)
                 speed=<tempo|pitch|both|none>
                      Set response to speed change.
                         tempo
                              Scale tempo in sync with speed (default).
                         pitch
                              Reverses effect of filter.  Scales pitch without
                              altering    tempo.     Add     ´[     speed_mult
                              0.9438743126816935´     and     ´]    speed_mult
                              1.059463094352953´ to your input.conf to step by
                              musical  semi-tones.   WARNING:  Loses sync with
                              video.
                         both Scale both tempo and pitch.
                         none Ignore speed changes.

              EXAMPLE:
                 mplayer -af scaletempo -speed 1.2 media.ogg
                      Would playback media at 1.2x normal speed, with audio at
                      normal pitch.  Changing playback speed, would change au‐
                      dio tempo to match.
                 mplayer -af scaletempo=scale=1.2:speed=none  -speed  1.2  me‐
                 dia.ogg
                      Would playback media at 1.2x normal speed, with audio at
                      normal pitch, but changing playback speed has no  effect
                      on audio tempo.
                 mplayer  -af  scaletempo=stride=30:overlap=.50:search=10  me‐
                 dia.ogg
                      Would tweak the quality and performace parameters.
                 mplayer -af format=floatne,scaletempo media.ogg
                      Would make scaletempo use float code.  Maybe  faster  on
                      some platforms.
                 mplayer -af scaletempo=scale=1.2:speed=pitch audio.ogg
                      Would playback audio file at 1.2x normal speed, with au‐
                      dio at normal pitch.   Changing  playback  speed,  would
                      change pitch, leaving audio tempo at 1.2x.

       stats
              Collects and prints statistics about the audio stream, especial‐
              ly the volume.  These statistics are especially intended to help
              adjusting  the  volume while avoiding clipping.  The volumes are
              printed in dB and compatible with the volume audio filter,  they
              are always rounded towards -0dB.

              The 'n_samples' field is the total number of samples seen by the
              filter.  The 'mean_volume' field is the root mean  square.   The
              'max_volume' field is exactly what it says.  The 'histogram_Xdb'
              fields count how many samples were at -XdB,  for  X  just  below
              max_volume.

              For  example,  if  max_volume  is  -7dB and histogram_7dB is 19,
              'volume=7' will not cause clipping  and  'volume=8'  will  cause
              clipping on exactly 19 samples.

VIDEO FILTERS
       Video  filters allow you to modify the video stream and its properties.
       The syntax is:

       -vf <filter1[=parameter1:parameter2:...],filter2,...>
              Setup a chain of video filters.

       Many parameters are optional and set to default values if omitted.   To
       explicitly use a default value set a parameter to '-1'.  Parameters w:h
       means width x height in pixels, x:y means x;y position counted from the
       upper left corner of the bigger image.
       NOTE: To get a full list of available video filters, see -vf help.

       Video filters are managed in lists.  There are a few commands to manage
       the filter list.

       -vf-add <filter1[,filter2,...]>
              Appends the filters given as arguments to the filter list.

       -vf-pre <filter1[,filter2,...]>
              Prepends the filters given as arguments to the filter list.

       -vf-del <index1[,index2,...]>
              Deletes the filters at the given indexes.  Index  numbers  start
              at  0,  negative  numbers address the end of the list (-1 is the
              last).

       -vf-clr
              Completely empties the filter list.

       With filters that support it, you can access parameters by their name.

       -vf <filter>=help
              Prints the parameter names and parameter value ranges for a par‐
              ticular filter.

       -vf <filter=named_parameter1=value1[:named_parameter2=value2:...]>
              Sets  a  named  parameter to the given value.  Use on and off or
              yes and no to set flag parameters.

       Available filters are:

       crop[=w:h:x:y]
              Crops the given part of the image and discards the rest.  Useful
              to remove black bands from widescreen movies.
                 <w>,<h>
                      Cropped width and height, defaults to original width and
                      height.
                 <x>,<y>
                      Position of the cropped picture, defaults to center.

       cropdetect[=limit:round[:reset]]
              Calculates necessary cropping parameters and prints  the  recom‐
              mended parameters to stdout.
                 <limit>
                      Threshold,  which can be optionally specified from noth‐
                      ing (0) to everything (255) (default: 24).
                 <round>
                      Value which the width/height should be divisible by (de‐
                      fault:  16).   The  offset  is automatically adjusted to
                      center the video.  Use 2 to  get  only  even  dimensions
                      (needed  for  4:2:2 video).  16 is best when encoding to
                      most video codecs.
                 <reset>
                      Counter that determines after how many frames cropdetect
                      will  reset  the  previously detected largest video area
                      and start over to detect the current optimal  crop  area
                      (default:  0).   This  can  be useful when channel logos
                      distort the video area.  0 indicates never reset and re‐
                      turn the largest area encountered during playback.

       rectangle[=w:h:x:y]
              Draws a rectangle of the requested width and height at the spec‐
              ified coordinates over the image and  prints  current  rectangle
              parameters  to  the  console.   This can be used to find optimal
              cropping parameters.   If  you  bind  the  input.conf  directive
              'change_rectangle'  to  keystrokes,  you can move and resize the
              rectangle on the fly.
                 <w>,<h>
                      width and height (default: -1,  maximum  possible  width
                      where boundaries are still visible.)
                 <x>,<y>
                      top  left  corner position (default: -1, uppermost left‐
                      most)

       expand[=w:h:x:y:o:a:r]
              Expands (not scales) movie resolution to  the  given  value  and
              places  the  unscaled original at coordinates x, y.  Can be used
              for placing subtitles/OSD in the resulting black bands.

                 <w>,<h>
                      Expanded width,height (default: original  width,height).
                      Negative  values  for  w and h are treated as offsets to
                      the original size.

                      EXAMPLE:
                           expand=0:-50:0:0
                                  Adds a 50 pixel border to the bottom of  the
                                  picture.

                 <x>,<y>
                      position  of  original  image on the expanded image (de‐
                      fault: center)

                 <o>
                      OSD/subtitle rendering
                         0: disable (default)
                         1: enable

                 <a>
                      Expands to fit an aspect instead of  a  resolution  (de‐
                      fault: 0).

                      EXAMPLE:
                           expand=800:::::4/3
                                  Expands  to  800x600,  unless  the source is
                                  higher resolution, in which case it  expands
                                  to fill a 4/3 aspect.

                 <r>
                      Rounds up to make both width and height divisible by <r>
                      (default: 1).

       flip (also see -flip)
              Flips the image upside down.

       mirror
              Mirrors the image on the Y axis.

       rotate[=<0-7>]
              Rotates the image by 90 degrees and optionally  flips  it.   For
              values  between  4-7 rotation is only done if the movie geometry
              is portrait and not landscape.

                 0    Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and flip (default).

                 1    Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise.

                 2    Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise.

                 3    Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and flip.

       scale[=w:h[:interlaced[:chr_drop[:par[:par2[:pre‐
       size[:noup[:arnd]]]]]]]]
              Scales  the image with the software scaler (slow) and performs a
              YUV<->RGB colorspace conversion (also see -sws).

                 <w>,<h>
                      scaled width/height (default: original width/height)
                      NOTE: If -zoom is used, and underlying filters  (includ‐
                      ing  libvo)  are  incapable  of  scaling, it defaults to
                      d_width/d_height!
                          0:   scaled d_width/d_height
                         -1:   original width/height
                         -2:   Calculate w/h using the other dimension and the
                         prescaled aspect ratio.
                         -3:   Calculate w/h using the other dimension and the
                         original aspect ratio.
                         -(n+8): Like -n above, but rounding the dimension  to
                         the closest multiple of 16.

                 <interlaced>
                      Toggle interlaced scaling.
                         0: off (default)
                         1: on

                 <chr_drop>
                      chroma skipping
                         0: Use all available input lines for chroma.
                         1: Use only every 2. input line for chroma.
                         2: Use only every 4. input line for chroma.
                         3: Use only every 8. input line for chroma.

                 <par>[:<par2>] (also see -sws)
                      Set  some  scaling  parameters  depending on the type of
                      scaler selected with -sws.
                         -sws 2 (bicubic):  B (blurring) and C (ringing)
                         0.00:0.60 default
                         0.00:0.75 VirtualDub's "precise bicubic"
                         0.00:0.50 Catmull-Rom spline
                         0.33:0.33 Mitchell-Netravali spline
                         1.00:0.00 cubic B-spline
                         -sws 7 (gaussian): sharpness (0 (soft) - 100 (sharp))
                         -sws 9 (lanczos):  filter length (1-10)

                 <presize>
                      Scale to preset sizes.
                         qntsc:   352x240 (NTSC quarter screen)
                         qpal:    352x288 (PAL quarter screen)
                         ntsc:    720x480 (standard NTSC)
                         pal:     720x576 (standard PAL)
                         sntsc:   640x480 (square pixel NTSC)
                         spal:    768x576 (square pixel PAL)

                 <noup>
                      Disallow upscaling past the original dimensions.
                         0: Allow upscaling (default).
                         1: Disallow upscaling if one  dimension  exceeds  its
                         original value.
                         2: Disallow upscaling if both dimensions exceed their
                         original values.

                 <arnd>
                      Accurate rounding for the vertical scaler, which may  be
                      faster or slower than the default rounding.
                         0: Disable accurate rounding (default).
                         1: Enable accurate rounding.

       dsize[=aspect|w:h:aspect-method:r]
              Changes  the  intended display size/aspect at an arbitrary point
              in the filter chain.  Aspect can be given as a fraction (4/3) or
              floating  point  number  (1.33).  Alternatively, you may specify
              the exact display width and height desired.  Note that this fil‐
              ter  does  not do any scaling itself; it just affects what later
              scalers (software or hardware) will do when auto-scaling to cor‐
              rect aspect.

                 <w>,<h>
                      New display width and height.  Can also be these special
                      values:
                          0:   original display width and height
                         -1:   original video width and height (default)
                         -2:   Calculate w/h using the other dimension and the
                         original display aspect ratio.
                         -3:   Calculate w/h using the other dimension and the
                         original video aspect ratio.

                 EXAMPLE:
                           dsize=800:-2
                                  Specifies a display  resolution  of  800x600
                                  for  a  4/3  aspect  video, or 800x450 for a
                                  16/9 aspect video.
                 <aspect-method>
                      Modifies width and height according to  original  aspect
                      ratios.
                         -1: Ignore original aspect ratio (default).
                          0: Keep display aspect ratio by using <w> and <h> as
                         maximum resolution.
                          1: Keep display aspect ratio by using <w> and <h> as
                         minimum resolution.
                          2:  Keep  video aspect ratio by using <w> and <h> as
                         maximum resolution.
                          3: Keep video aspect ratio by using <w> and  <h>  as
                         minimum resolution.

                 EXAMPLE:
                           dsize=800:600:0
                                  Specifies  a  display  resolution of at most
                                  800x600, or smaller, in order  to  keep  as‐
                                  pect.

                 <r>
                      Rounds up to make both width and height divisible by <r>
                      (default: 1).

       yvu9
              Forces software YVU9 to YV12 colorspace conversion.   Deprecated
              in favor of the software scaler.

       yuvcsp
              Clamps YUV color values to the CCIR 601 range without doing real
              conversion.

       palette
              RGB/BGR 8 -> 15/16/24/32bpp colorspace conversion using palette.

       format[=fourcc[:outfourcc]]
              Restricts the colorspace for the next filter without  doing  any
              conversion.   Use together with the scale filter for a real con‐
              version.
              NOTE: For a list of available formats see format=fmt=help.
                 <fourcc>
                      format name like rgb15, bgr24, yv12, etc (default: yuy2)
                 <outfourcc>
                      Format name that should be substituted for  the  output.
                      If  this  is not 100% compatible with the <fourcc> value
                      it will crash.
                      Valid examples:
                      format=rgb24:bgr24 format=yuyv:yuy2
                      Invalid examples (will crash):
                      format=rgb24:yv12

       noformat[=fourcc]
              Restricts the colorspace for the next filter without  doing  any
              conversion.   Unlike the format filter, this will allow any col‐
              orspace except the one you specify.
              NOTE: For a list of available formats see noformat=fmt=help.
                 <fourcc>
                      format name like rgb15, bgr24, yv12, etc (default: yv12)

       pp[=filter1[:option1[:option2...]]/[-]filter2...] (also see -pphelp)
              Enables the specified chain of postprocessing subfilters.   Sub‐
              filters must be separated by '/' and can be disabled by prepend‐
              ing a '-'.  Each subfilter and some options have a short  and  a
              long  name  that can be used interchangeably, i.e. dr/dering are
              the same.  All subfilters  share  common  options  to  determine
              their scope:
                 a/autoq
                      Automatically switch the subfilter off if the CPU is too
                      slow.
                 c/chrom
                      Do chrominance filtering, too (default).
                 y/nochrom
                      Do luminance filtering only (no chrominance).
                 n/noluma
                      Do chrominance filtering only (no luminance).

              NOTE: -pphelp shows a list of available subfilters.

              Available subfilters are

                 hb/hdeblock[:difference[:flatness]]
                      horizontal deblocking filter
                         <difference>: Difference factor where  higher  values
                         mean more deblocking (default: 32).
                         <flatness>:  Flatness  threshold  where  lower values
                         mean more deblocking (default: 39).

                 vb/vdeblock[:difference[:flatness]]
                      vertical deblocking filter
                         <difference>: Difference factor where  higher  values
                         mean more deblocking (default: 32).
                         <flatness>:  Flatness  threshold  where  lower values
                         mean more deblocking (default: 39).

                 ha/hadeblock[:difference[:flatness]]
                      accurate horizontal deblocking filter
                         <difference>: Difference factor where  higher  values
                         mean more deblocking (default: 32).
                         <flatness>:  Flatness  threshold  where  lower values
                         mean more deblocking (default: 39).

                 va/vadeblock[:difference[:flatness]]
                      accurate vertical deblocking filter
                         <difference>: Difference factor where  higher  values
                         mean more deblocking (default: 32).
                         <flatness>:  Flatness  threshold  where  lower values
                         mean more deblocking (default: 39).

                 The horizontal and vertical deblocking filters share the dif‐
                 ference and flatness values so you cannot set different hori‐
                 zontal and vertical thresholds.


                 h1/x1hdeblock
                      experimental horizontal deblocking filter

                 v1/x1vdeblock
                      experimental vertical deblocking filter

                 dr/dering
                      deringing filter

                 tn/tmpnoise[:threshold1[:threshold2[:threshold3]]]
                      temporal noise reducer
                         <threshold1>: larger -> stronger filtering
                         <threshold2>: larger -> stronger filtering
                         <threshold3>: larger -> stronger filtering

                 al/autolevels[:f/fullyrange]
                      automatic brightness / contrast correction
                         f/fullyrange: Stretch luminance to (0-255).

                 lb/linblenddeint
                      Linear blend deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces  the
                      given  block  by filtering all lines with a (1 2 1) fil‐
                      ter.

                 li/linipoldeint
                      Linear interpolating deinterlacing filter that  deinter‐
                      laces  the  given  block by linearly interpolating every
                      second line.

                 ci/cubicipoldeint
                      Cubic interpolating  deinterlacing  filter  deinterlaces
                      the  given block by cubically interpolating every second
                      line.

                 md/mediandeint
                      Median deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the  given
                      block by applying a median filter to every second line.

                 fd/ffmpegdeint
                      FFmpeg  deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given
                      block by filtering every second line with a (-1  4  2  4
                      -1) filter.

                 l5/lowpass5
                      Vertically applied FIR lowpass deinterlacing filter that
                      deinterlaces the given block by filtering all lines with
                      a (-1 2 6 2 -1) filter.

                 fq/forceQuant[:quantizer]
                      Overrides  the  quantizer  table from the input with the
                      constant quantizer you specify.
                         <quantizer>: quantizer to use

                 de/default
                      default pp filter combination (hb:a,vb:a,dr:a)

                 fa/fast
                      fast pp filter combination (h1:a,v1:a,dr:a)

                 ac
                      high      quality      pp       filter       combination
                      (ha:a:128:7,va:a,dr:a)

              EXAMPLE:
                 -vf pp=hb/vb/dr/al
                      horizontal  and vertical deblocking, deringing and auto‐
                      matic brightness/contrast
                 -vf pp=de/-al
                      default filters without brightness/contrast correction
                 -vf pp=default/tmpnoise:1:2:3
                      Enable default filters & temporal denoiser.
                 -vf pp=hb:y/vb:a
                      Horizontal deblocking on luminance only, and switch ver‐
                      tical  deblocking  on  or off automatically depending on
                      available CPU time.

       spp[=quality[:qp[:mode]]]
              Simple postprocessing filter that  compresses  and  decompresses
              the image at several (or - in the case of quality level 6 - all)
              shifts and averages the results.

                 <quality>
                      0-6 (default: 3)

                 <qp>
                      Force quantization parameter (default: 0,  use  QP  from
                      video).

                 <mode>
                      0: hard thresholding (default)
                      1: soft thresholding (better deringing, but blurrier)
                      4: like 0, but also use B-frames' QP (may cause flicker)
                      5: like 1, but also use B-frames' QP (may cause flicker)

       uspp[=quality[:qp]]
              Ultra  simple  &  slow postprocessing filter that compresses and
              decompresses the image at several (or - in the case  of  quality
              level  8  -  all) shifts and averages the results.  The way this
              differs from the behavior of spp is that uspp actually encodes &
              decodes  each case with libavcodec Snow, whereas spp uses a sim‐
              plified intra only 8x8 DCT similar to MJPEG.

                 <quality>
                      0-8 (default: 3)

                 <qp>
                      Force quantization parameter (default: 0,  use  QP  from
                      video).

       fspp[=quality[:qp[:strength[:bframes]]]]
              faster version of the simple postprocessing filter

                 <quality>
                      4-5 (equivalent to spp; default: 4)

                 <qp>
                      Force  quantization  parameter  (default: 0, use QP from
                      video).

                 <-15-32>
                      Filter strength, lower values mean more details but also
                      more  artifacts,  while  higher  values  make  the image
                      smoother but also blurrier (default: 0 - PSNR optimal).

                 <bframes>
                      0: do not use QP from B-frames (default)
                      1: use QP from B-frames too (may cause flicker)

       pp7[=qp[:mode]]
              Variant of the spp filter, similar to spp=6  with  7  point  DCT
              where only the center sample is used after IDCT.

                 <qp>
                      Force  quantization  parameter  (default: 0, use QP from
                      video).

                 <mode>
                      0: hard thresholding
                      1: soft thresholding (better deringing, but blurrier)
                      2: medium thresholding (default, good results)

       qp=equation
              quantization parameter (QP) change filter

                 <equation>
                      some equation like "2+2*sin(PI*qp)"

       geq=equation
              generic equation change filter

                 <equation>
                      Some equation, e.g.  'p(W-X\,Y)' to flip the image hori‐
                      zontally.   You  can use whitespace to make the equation
                      more readable.  There are a couple of constants that can
                      be used in the equation:
                         PI: the number pi
                         E: the number e
                         X / Y: the coordinates of the current sample
                         W / H: width and height of the image
                         SW / SH: width/height scale depending on the current‐
                         ly filtered plane,  e.g.  1,1  and  0.5,0.5  for  YUV
                         4:2:0.
                         p(x,y):  returns  the  value of the pixel at location
                         x/y of the current plane.

       test
              Generate various test patterns.

       rgbtest[=width:height]
              Generate an RGB test pattern useful for detecting RGB vs BGR is‐
              sues.   You  should see a red, green and blue stripe from top to
              bottom.

                 <width>
                      Desired width of generated image (default: 0).  0  means
                      width of input image.

                 <height>
                      Desired height of generated image (default: 0).  0 means
                      height of input image.

       lavc[=quality:fps]
              Fast software YV12 to MPEG-1 conversion with libavcodec for  use
              with DVB/DXR3/IVTV/V4L2.

                 <quality>
                      1-31: fixed qscale
                      32-:  fixed bitrate in kbits

                 <fps>
                      force  output  fps (float value) (default: 0, autodetect
                      based on height)

       dvbscale[=aspect]
              Set up optimal scaling for DVB cards,  scaling  the  x  axis  in
              hardware  and calculating the y axis scaling in software to keep
              aspect.  Only useful together with expand and scale.

                 <aspect>
                      Control aspect ratio, calculate as  DVB_HEIGHT*ASPECTRA‐
                      TIO  (default:  576*4/3=768),  set it to 576*(16/9)=1024
                      for a 16:9 TV.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -vf dvbscale,scale=-1:0,expand=-1:576:-1:-1:1,lavc
                      FIXME: Explain what this does.

       noise[=luma[u][t|a][h][p]:chroma[u][t|a][h][p]]
              Adds noise.
                 <0-100>
                      luma noise
                 <0-100>
                      chroma noise
                 u    uniform noise (gaussian otherwise)
                 t    temporal noise (noise pattern changes between frames)
                 a    averaged temporal noise (smoother, but a lot slower)
                 h    high quality (slightly better looking, slightly slower)
                 p    mix random noise with a (semi)regular pattern

       denoise3d[=luma_spatial:chroma_spatial:luma_tmp:chroma_tmp]
              This filter aims to reduce image noise producing  smooth  images
              and  making  still images really still (This should enhance com‐
              pressibility.).
                 <luma_spatial>
                      spatial luma strength (default: 4)
                 <chroma_spatial>
                      spatial chroma strength (default: 3)
                 <luma_tmp>
                      luma temporal strength (default: 6)
                 <chroma_tmp>
                      chroma temporal strength (default:  luma_tmp*chroma_spa‐
                      tial/luma_spatial)

       hqdn3d[=luma_spatial:chroma_spatial:luma_tmp:chroma_tmp]
              High precision/quality version of the denoise3d filter.  Parame‐
              ters and usage are the same.

       ow[=depth[:luma_strength[:chroma_strength]]]
              Overcomplete Wavelet denoiser.
                 <depth>
                      Larger depth values will denoise lower frequency  compo‐
                      nents more, but slow down filtering (default: 8).
                 <luma_strength>
                      luma strength (default: 1.0)
                 <chroma_strength>
                      chroma strength (default: 1.0)

       eq[=brightness:contrast] (OBSOLETE)
              Software equalizer with interactive controls just like the hard‐
              ware equalizer, for cards/drivers that do not support brightness
              and  contrast  controls  in hardware.  Might also be useful with
              MEncoder, either for  fixing  poorly  captured  movies,  or  for
              slightly  reducing  contrast  to  mask artifacts and get by with
              lower bitrates.
                 <-100-100>
                      initial brightness
                 <-100-100>
                      initial contrast

       eq2[=gamma:contrast:brightness:saturation:rg:gg:bg:weight]
              Alternative software equalizer that  uses  lookup  tables  (very
              slow),  allowing  gamma correction in addition to simple bright‐
              ness and contrast adjustment.  Note that it uses  the  same  MMX
              optimized  code  as -vf eq if all gamma values are 1.0.  The pa‐
              rameters are given as floating point values.
                 <0.1-10>
                      initial gamma value (default: 1.0)
                 <-2-2>
                      initial contrast, where negative values result in a neg‐
                      ative image (default: 1.0)
                 <-1-1>
                      initial brightness (default: 0.0)
                 <0-3>
                      initial saturation (default: 1.0)
                 <0.1-10>
                      gamma value for the red component (default: 1.0)
                 <0.1-10>
                      gamma value for the green component (default: 1.0)
                 <0.1-10>
                      gamma value for the blue component (default: 1.0)
                 <0-1>
                      The weight parameter can be used to reduce the effect of
                      a high gamma value on bright image areas, e.g. keep them
                      from getting overamplified and just plain white.  A val‐
                      ue of 0.0 turns the gamma correction all  the  way  down
                      while 1.0 leaves it at its full strength (default: 1.0).

       hue[=hue:saturation]
              Software equalizer with interactive controls just like the hard‐
              ware equalizer, for cards/drivers that do not  support  hue  and
              saturation controls in hardware.
                 <-180-180>
                      initial hue (default: 0.0)
                 <-100-100>
                      initial  saturation,  where  negative values result in a
                      negative chroma (default: 1.0)

       halfpack[=f]
              Convert planar YUV 4:2:0 to half-height packed  4:2:2,  downsam‐
              pling luma but keeping all chroma samples.  Useful for output to
              low-resolution display devices when hardware downscaling is poor
              quality  or  is  not available.  Can also be used as a primitive
              luma-only deinterlacer with very low CPU usage.
                 <f>
                      By default, halfpack averages pairs of lines when  down‐
                      sampling.  Any value different from 0 or 1 gives the de‐
                      fault (averaging) behavior.
                         0: Only use even lines when downsampling.
                         1: Only use odd lines when downsampling.

       ilpack[=mode]
              When interlaced video is stored in YUV 4:2:0 formats, chroma in‐
              terlacing does not line up properly due to vertical downsampling
              of the chroma channels.  This filter packs the planar 4:2:0 data
              into  YUY2  (4:2:2) format with the chroma lines in their proper
              locations, so that in any given scanline, the  luma  and  chroma
              data both come from the same field.
                 <mode>
                      Select the sampling mode.
                         0: nearest-neighbor sampling, fast but incorrect
                         1: linear interpolation (default)

       harddup
              Only useful with MEncoder.  If harddup is used when encoding, it
              will force duplicate frames to be encoded in the  output.   This
              uses  slightly  more  space, but is necessary for output to MPEG
              files or if you plan to demux and remux the video  stream  after
              encoding.   Should  be  placed  at or near the end of the filter
              chain unless you have a good reason to do otherwise.

       softskip
              Only useful with MEncoder.  Softskip moves  the  frame  skipping
              (dropping) step of encoding from before the filter chain to some
              point during the filter chain.  This allows filters  which  need
              to  see  all frames (inverse telecine, temporal denoising, etc.)
              to function properly.  Should be placed after the filters  which
              need  to  see  all frames and before any subsequent filters that
              are CPU-intensive.

       decimate[=max:hi:lo:frac]
              Drops frames that do not differ greatly from the previous  frame
              in  order  to  reduce framerate.  The main use of this filter is
              for very-low-bitrate encoding (e.g. streaming  over  dialup  mo‐
              dem), but it could in theory be used for fixing movies that were
              inverse-telecined incorrectly.
                 <max>
                      Sets the maximum number of consecutive frames which  can
                      be  dropped  (if  positive), or the minimum interval be‐
                      tween dropped frames (if negative).
                 <hi>,<lo>,<frac>
                      A frame is a candidate for dropping  if  no  8x8  region
                      differs  by  more  than  a threshold of <hi>, and if not
                      more than <frac> portion (1  meaning  the  whole  image)
                      differs  by  more  than  a threshold of <lo>.  Values of
                      <hi> and <lo> are for 8x8 pixel blocks and represent ac‐
                      tual  pixel value differences, so a threshold of 64 cor‐
                      responds to 1 unit of difference for each pixel, or  the
                      same spread out differently over the block.

       dint[=sense:level]
              The  drop-deinterlace  (dint) filter detects and drops the first
              from a set of interlaced video frames.
                 <0.0-1.0>
                      relative difference between neighboring pixels (default:
                      0.1)
                 <0.0-1.0>
                      What  part of the image has to be detected as interlaced
                      to drop the frame (default: 0.15).

       lavcdeint (OBSOLETE)
              FFmpeg deinterlacing filter, same as -vf pp=fd

       lavfi=filtergraph
              FFmpeg libavfilter wrapper.  filtergraph defines a whole  libav‐
              filter graph with one input and one output.  See http://www.ffm‐
              peg.org/libavfilter.html#SEC4 for details.

              As a special case, if filtergraph is $word then the value of the
              word  environment  variable is used; this is necessary if commas
              are present in the graph description, as mplayer uses them as  a
              delimiter between filters.

              NOTE:  This  filter  is considered experimental, it may interact
              strangely with other filters.

              EXAMPLE:
              overlay="movie=$small_video, scale=160:120 [ca]; [in] [ca] over‐
              lay=16:8" mplayer -vf lavfi='$overlay' $big_video

       kerndeint[=thresh[:map[:order[:sharp[:twoway]]]]]
              Donald Graft's adaptive kernel deinterlacer.  Deinterlaces parts
              of a video if a configurable threshold is exceeded.
                 <0-255>
                      threshold (default: 10)
                 <map>
                         0: Ignore pixels exceeding the threshold (default).
                         1: Paint pixels exceeding the threshold white.

                 <order>
                         0: Leave fields alone (default).
                         1: Swap fields.

                 <sharp>
                         0: Disable additional sharpening (default).
                         1: Enable additional sharpening.

                 <twoway>
                         0: Disable twoway sharpening (default).
                         1: Enable twoway sharpening.

       unsharp[=l|cWxH:amount[:l|cWxH:amount]]
              unsharp mask / gaussian blur

                 l
                      Apply effect on luma component.

                 c
                      Apply effect on chroma components.

                 <width>x<height>
                      width and height of the matrix, odd sized in both direc‐
                      tions  (min  =  3x3, max = 13x11 or 11x13, usually some‐
                      thing between 3x3 and 7x7)

                 amount
                      Relative amount of sharpness/blur to add to the image (a
                      sane range should be -1.5-1.5).
                         <0: blur
                         >0: sharpen

       swapuv
              Swap U & V plane.

       il[=d|i][s][:[d|i][s]]
              (De)interleaves  lines.   The  goal of this filter is to add the
              ability to process interlaced images pre-field without  deinter‐
              lacing  them.  You can filter your interlaced DVD and play it on
              a TV without  breaking  the  interlacing.   While  deinterlacing
              (with the postprocessing filter) removes interlacing permanently
              (by smoothing, averaging, etc) deinterleaving splits  the  frame
              into  2  fields  (so  called  half pictures), so you can process
              (filter) them independently and then re-interleave them.
                 d    deinterleave (placing one above the other)
                 i    interleave
                 s    swap fields (exchange even & odd lines)

       fil[=i|d]
              (De)interleaves lines.  This filter is very similar  to  the  il
              filter  but  much  faster, the main disadvantage is that it does
              not always work.  Especially if combined with other  filters  it
              may  produce  randomly messed up images, so be happy if it works
              but do not complain if it does not for your combination of  fil‐
              ters.
                 d    Deinterleave fields, placing them side by side.
                 i    Interleave fields again (reversing the effect of fil=d).

       field[=n]
              Extracts  a  single  field from an interlaced image using stride
              arithmetic to avoid wasting CPU time.  The optional  argument  n
              specifies  whether to extract the even or the odd field (depend‐
              ing on whether n is even or odd).

       detc[=var1=value1:var2=value2:...]
              Attempts to reverse the 'telecine' process to recover  a  clean,
              non-interlaced stream at film framerate.  This was the first and
              most primitive inverse telecine filter to be added  to  MPlayer/
              MEncoder.   It  works  by latching onto the telecine 3:2 pattern
              and following it as long as possible.  This  makes  it  suitable
              for perfectly-telecined material, even in the presence of a fair
              degree of noise, but it will fail in  the  presence  of  complex
              post-telecine  edits.   Development  on this filter is no longer
              taking place, as ivtc, pullup, and filmdint are better for  most
              applications.  The following arguments (see syntax above) may be
              used to control detc's behavior:

                 <dr>
                      Set the frame dropping mode.
                         0: Do not drop frames to maintain fixed output  fram‐
                         erate (default).
                         1:  Always drop a frame when there have been no drops
                         or telecine merges in the past 5 frames.
                         2: Always maintain exact 5:4 input  to  output  frame
                         ratio.
                         NOTE: Use mode 1 or 2 with MEncoder.

                 <am>
                      Analysis mode.
                         0:  Fixed pattern with initial frame number specified
                         by <fr>.
                         1: aggressive search for telecine pattern (default)

                 <fr>
                      Set initial frame number in sequence.  0-2 are the three
                      clean progressive frames; 3 and 4 are the two interlaced
                      frames.  The default, -1, means  'not  in  telecine  se‐
                      quence'.   The number specified here is the type for the
                      imaginary previous frame before the movie starts.

                 <t0>, <t1>, <t2>, <t3>
                      Threshold values to be used in certain modes.

       ivtc[=1]
              Experimental 'stateless' inverse telecine filter.   Rather  than
              trying  to  lock on to a pattern like the detc filter does, ivtc
              makes its decisions independently for  each  frame.   This  will
              give  much  better results for material that has undergone heavy
              editing after telecine was applied, but as a result it is not as
              forgiving  of noisy input, for example TV capture.  The optional
              parameter (ivtc=1) corresponds to the dr=1 option for  the  detc
              filter,  and  should be used with MEncoder but not with MPlayer.
              As with detc, you must  specify  the  correct  output  framerate
              (-ofps  24000/1001) when using MEncoder.  Further development on
              ivtc has stopped, as the pullup and filmdint filters  appear  to
              be much more accurate.

       pullup[=jl:jr:jt:jb:sb:mp]
              Third-generation  pulldown  reversal  (inverse telecine) filter,
              capable of handling mixed hard-telecine, 24000/1001 fps progres‐
              sive, and 30000/1001 fps progressive content.  The pullup filter
              is designed to be much more robust than detc or ivtc, by  taking
              advantage of future context in making its decisions.  Like ivtc,
              pullup is stateless in the sense that it does not  lock  onto  a
              pattern to follow, but it instead looks forward to the following
              fields in order to  identify  matches  and  rebuild  progressive
              frames.  It is still under development, but believed to be quite
              accurate.

                 jl, jr, jt, and jb
                      These options set the amount of "junk" to ignore at  the
                      left, right, top, and bottom of the image, respectively.
                      Left/right are in units of 8  pixels,  while  top/bottom
                      are  in  units  of  2 lines.  The default is 8 pixels on
                      each side.

                 sb (strict breaks)
                      Setting this option to 1  will  reduce  the  chances  of
                      pullup generating an occasional mismatched frame, but it
                      may also cause an  excessive  number  of  frames  to  be
                      dropped  during high motion sequences.  Conversely, set‐
                      ting it to -1 will make pullup match fields more easily.
                      This  may help processing of video where there is slight
                      blurring between the fields, but may also cause there to
                      be interlaced frames in the output.

                 mp (metric plane)
                      This  option  may be set to 1 or 2 to use a chroma plane
                      instead of the luma plane for  doing  pullup's  computa‐
                      tions.   This  may improve accuracy on very clean source
                      material, but more likely will decrease accuracy,  espe‐
                      cially  if there is chroma noise (rainbow effect) or any
                      grayscale video.  The main purpose of setting  mp  to  a
                      chroma  plane  is to reduce CPU load and make pullup us‐
                      able in realtime on slow machines.

              NOTE: Always follow pullup with the softskip filter when  encod‐
              ing to ensure that pullup is able to see each frame.  Failure to
              do so will lead to incorrect output and will usually crash,  due
              to design limitations in the codec/filter layer.

       filmdint[=options]
              Inverse telecine filter, similar to the pullup filter above.  It
              is designed to handle any pulldown pattern, including mixed soft
              and hard telecine and limited support for movies that are slowed
              down or sped up from their original framerate for TV.  Only  the
              luma  plane is used to find the frame breaks.  If a field has no
              match, it is deinterlaced with simple linear approximation.   If
              the source is MPEG-2, this must be the first filter to allow ac‐
              cess to the field-flags set by the MPEG-2 decoder.  Depending on
              the  source  MPEG, you may be fine ignoring this advice, as long
              as you do not see lots of "Bottom-first field"  warnings.   With
              no  options  it does normal inverse telecine, and should be used
              together with mencoder -fps 30000/1001 -ofps  24000/1001.   When
              this  filter  is  used with MPlayer, it will result in an uneven
              framerate during playback, but it is still generally better than
              using pp=lb or no deinterlacing at all.  Multiple options can be
              specified separated by /.

                 crop=<w>:<h>:<x>:<y>
                      Just like the crop filter,  but  faster,  and  works  on
                      mixed  hard and soft telecined content as well as when y
                      is not a multiple of 4.  If x or y would  require  crop‐
                      ping  fractional pixels from the chroma planes, the crop
                      area is extended.  This usually means that x and y  must
                      be even.

                 io=<ifps>:<ofps>
                      For  each  ifps input frames the filter will output ofps
                      frames.   The  ratio  of  ifps/ofps  should  match   the
                      -fps/-ofps  ratio.   This could be used to filter movies
                      that are broadcast on TV at a frame rate different  from
                      their original framerate.

                 luma_only=<n>
                      If  n  is nonzero, the chroma plane is copied unchanged.
                      This is useful for YV12 sampled TV, which  discards  one
                      of the chroma fields.

                 mmx2=<n>
                      On  x86,  if  n=1, use MMX2 optimized functions, if n=2,
                      use 3DNow!  optimized functions, otherwise, use plain C.
                      If this option is not specified, MMX2 and 3DNow! are au‐
                      to-detected, use this option to override auto-detection.

                 fast=<n>
                      The larger n will speed up the filter at the expense  of
                      accuracy.   The  default  value  is n=3.  If n is odd, a
                      frame immediately following a frame marked with the  RE‐
                      PEAT_FIRST_FIELD MPEG flag is assumed to be progressive,
                      thus filter will not spend any  time  on  soft-telecined
                      MPEG-2 content.  This is the only effect of this flag if
                      MMX2 or 3DNow! is available.  Without MMX2 and 3DNow, if
                      n=0 or 1, the same calculations will be used as with n=2
                      or 3.  If n=2 or 3, the number of luma  levels  used  to
                      find  the frame breaks is reduced from 256 to 128, which
                      results in a faster filter without losing much accuracy.
                      If  n=4  or  5,  a faster, but much less accurate metric
                      will be used to find the frame  breaks,  which  is  more
                      likely  to  misdetect high vertical detail as interlaced
                      content.

                 verbose=<n>
                      If n is nonzero, print the  detailed  metrics  for  each
                      frame.  Useful for debugging.

                 dint_thres=<n>
                      Deinterlace  threshold.   Used  during de-interlacing of
                      unmatched frames.  Larger value means  less  deinterlac‐
                      ing,  use  n=256  to  completely turn off deinterlacing.
                      Default is n=8.

                 comb_thres=<n>
                      Threshold for comparing a top and  bottom  fields.   De‐
                      faults to 128.

                 diff_thres=<n>
                      Threshold to detect temporal change of a field.  Default
                      is 128.

                 sad_thres=<n>
                      Sum of Absolute Difference threshold, default is 64.

       softpulldown
              This filter works only correct with MEncoder  and  acts  on  the
              MPEG-2 flags used for soft 3:2 pulldown (soft telecine).  If you
              want to use the ivtc or detc filter on movies  that  are  partly
              soft  telecined,  inserting  this filter before them should make
              them more reliable.

       divtc[=options]
              Inverse  telecine  for  deinterlaced  video.   If   3:2-pulldown
              telecined  video  has  lost one of the fields or is deinterlaced
              using a method that keeps one field and interpolates the  other,
              the  result is a juddering video that has every fourth frame du‐
              plicated.  This filter is intended to find and drop those dupli‐
              cates  and restore the original film framerate.  When using this
              filter, you must specify -ofps that is 4/5 of the fps of the in‐
              put  file  and  place  the softskip later in the filter chain to
              make sure that divtc sees all the frames.  Two  different  modes
              are  available: One pass mode is the default and is straightfor‐
              ward to use, but has the disadvantage that any  changes  in  the
              telecine phase (lost frames or bad edits) cause momentary judder
              until the filter can resync again.  Two pass mode avoids this by
              analyzing  the  whole  video  beforehand so it will have forward
              knowledge about the phase changes and can resync  at  the  exact
              spot.  These passes do not correspond to pass one and two of the
              encoding process.  You must run an extra pass using  divtc  pass
              one  before  the  actual  encoding  throwing the resulting video
              away.  Use -nosound -ovc raw -o /dev/null to avoid  wasting  CPU
              power  for  this  pass.  You may add something like crop=2:2:0:0
              after divtc to speed things up even more.  Then use  divtc  pass
              two  for the actual encoding.  If you use multiple encoder pass‐
              es, use divtc pass two for all of them.  The options are:

                 pass=1|2
                      Use two pass mode.

                 file=<filename>
                      Set  the  two  pass  log  filename  (default:   "framed‐
                      iff.log").

                 threshold=<value>
                      Set  the minimum strength the telecine pattern must have
                      for the filter to believe in it (default: 0.5).  This is
                      used  to  avoid recognizing false pattern from the parts
                      of the video that are very dark or very still.

                 window=<numframes>
                      Set the number of past frames to look at when  searching
                      for  pattern  (default: 30).  Longer window improves the
                      reliability of the pattern search,  but  shorter  window
                      improves  the  reaction  time  to  the  changes  in  the
                      telecine phase.  This only affects the  one  pass  mode.
                      The  two  pass mode currently uses fixed window that ex‐
                      tends to both future and past.

                 phase=0|1|2|3|4
                      Sets the initial telecine phase for one pass  mode  (de‐
                      fault:  0).  The two pass mode can see the future, so it
                      is able to use the correct phase from the beginning, but
                      one  pass  mode  can only guess.  It catches the correct
                      phase when it finds it, but this option can be  used  to
                      fix  the possible juddering at the beginning.  The first
                      pass of the two pass mode also uses this, so if you save
                      the  output  from the first pass, you get constant phase
                      result.

                 deghost=<value>
                      Set the deghosting threshold (0-255 for one  pass  mode,
                      -255-255  for  two  pass  mode, default 0).  If nonzero,
                      deghosting mode is used.  This is  for  video  that  has
                      been  deinterlaced  by  blending the fields together in‐
                      stead of dropping one of the fields.  Deghosting  ampli‐
                      fies any compression artifacts in the blended frames, so
                      the parameter value is used as a  threshold  to  exclude
                      those pixels from deghosting that differ from the previ‐
                      ous frame less than specified value.  If two  pass  mode
                      is  used,  then  negative  value can be used to make the
                      filter analyze the  whole  video  in  the  beginning  of
                      pass-2  to  determine whether it needs deghosting or not
                      and then select either zero or the absolute value of the
                      parameter.   Specify this option for pass-2, it makes no
                      difference on pass-1.

       phase[=t|b|p|a|u|T|B|A|U][:v]
              Delay interlaced video by one field time so that the field order
              changes.   The  intended use is to fix PAL movies that have been
              captured with the opposite  field  order  to  the  film-to-video
              transfer.  The options are:

                 t    Capture  field  order  top-first, transfer bottom-first.
                      Filter will delay the bottom field.

                 b    Capture bottom-first, transfer top-first.   Filter  will
                      delay the top field.

                 p    Capture  and  transfer  with the same field order.  This
                      mode only exists for the documentation of the other  op‐
                      tions  to  refer  to, but if you actually select it, the
                      filter will faithfully do nothing ;-)

                 a    Capture field order determined  automatically  by  field
                      flags,  transfer opposite.  Filter selects among t and b
                      modes on a frame by frame basis using field  flags.   If
                      no  field information is available, then this works just
                      like u.

                 u    Capture unknown or varying, transfer  opposite.   Filter
                      selects  among t and b on a frame by frame basis by ana‐
                      lyzing the images and  selecting  the  alternative  that
                      produces best match between the fields.

                 T    Capture  top-first, transfer unknown or varying.  Filter
                      selects among t and p using image analysis.

                 B    Capture bottom-first, transfer unknown or varying.  Fil‐
                      ter selects among b and p using image analysis.

                 A    Capture  determined  by field flags, transfer unknown or
                      varying.  Filter selects among t, b and  p  using  field
                      flags  and  image  analysis.  If no field information is
                      available, then this works just like U.  This is the de‐
                      fault mode.

                 U    Both  capture  and  transfer unknown or varying.  Filter
                      selects among t, b and p using image analysis only.

                 v    Verbose operation.  Prints the selected  mode  for  each
                      frame  and the average squared difference between fields
                      for t, b, and p alternatives.

       telecine[=start]
              Apply 3:2 'telecine' process to increase framerate by 20%.  This
              most  likely will not work correctly with MPlayer, but it can be
              used  with  'mencoder  -fps  30000/1001  -ofps  30000/1001   -vf
              telecine'.   Both  fps  options  are  essential!  (A/V sync will
              break if they are wrong.)  The optional  start  parameter  tells
              the filter where in the telecine pattern to start (0-3).

       tinterlace[=mode]
              Temporal  field  interlacing - merge pairs of frames into an in‐
              terlaced frame, halving the framerate.  Even  frames  are  moved
              into  the  upper field, odd frames to the lower field.  This can
              be used to fully reverse the effect of the  tfields  filter  (in
              mode 0).  Available modes are:
                 0    Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the low‐
                      er field, generating a full-height frame at half framer‐
                      ate.
                 1    Only  output odd frames, even frames are dropped; height
                      unchanged.
                 2    Only output even frames, odd frames are dropped;  height
                      unchanged.
                 3    Expand  each  frame  to  full  height, but pad alternate
                      lines with black; framerate unchanged.
                 4    Interleave even lines from even frames  with  odd  lines
                      from odd frames.  Height unchanged at half framerate.

       tfields[=mode[:field_dominance]]
              Temporal  field  separation - split fields into frames, doubling
              the output framerate.  Like the telecine filter,  tfields  might
              not  work  completely  right  unless used with MEncoder and both
              -fps and -ofps set to the desired (double) framerate!
                 <mode>
                      0: Leave fields unchanged (will jump/flicker).
                      1: Interpolate missing lines. (The algorithm used  might
                      not be so good.)
                      2:  Translate fields by 1/4 pixel with linear interpola‐
                      tion (no jump).
                      4: Translate fields by 1/4 pixel with 4tap filter (high‐
                      er quality) (default).
                 <field_dominance> (DEPRECATED)
                      -1: auto (default) Only works if the decoder exports the
                      appropriate information and no other filters which  dis‐
                      card  that information come before tfields in the filter
                      chain, otherwise it falls back to 0 (top field first).
                      0: top field first
                      1: bottom field first
                      NOTE: This option will possibly be removed in  a  future
                      version.  Use -field-dominance instead.

       yadif=[mode[:field_dominance]]
              Yet another deinterlacing filter
                 <mode>
                      0: Output 1 frame for each frame.
                      1: Output 1 frame for each field.
                      2: Like 0 but skips spatial interlacing check.
                      3: Like 1 but skips spatial interlacing check.
                 <field_dominance> (DEPRECATED)
                      Operates like tfields.
                      NOTE:  This  option will possibly be removed in a future
                      version.  Use -field-dominance instead.

       mcdeint=[mode[:parity[:qp]]]
              Motion compensating deinterlacer.  It needs one field per  frame
              as  input  and  must  thus  be  used  together with tfields=1 or
              yadif=1/3 or equivalent.
                 <mode>
                      0: fast
                      1: medium
                      2: slow, iterative motion estimation
                      3: extra slow, like 2 plus multiple reference frames
                 <parity>
                      0 or 1 selects which field to use (note:  no  autodetec‐
                      tion yet!).
                 <qp>
                      Higher  values should result in a smoother motion vector
                      field but less optimal individual vectors.

       boxblur=radius:power[:radius:power]
              box blur
                 <radius>
                      blur filter strength
                 <power>
                      number of filter applications

       sab=radius:pf:colorDiff[:radius:pf:colorDiff]
              shape adaptive blur
                 <radius>
                      blur filter strength (~0.1-4.0) (slower if larger)
                 <pf>
                      prefilter strength (~0.1-2.0)
                 <colorDiff>
                      maximum difference between pixels to still be considered
                      (~0.1-100.0)

       smartblur=radius:strength:threshold[:radius:strength:threshold]
              smart blur
                 <radius>
                      blur filter strength (~0.1-5.0) (slower if larger)
                 <strength>
                      blur (0.0-1.0) or sharpen (-1.0-0.0)
                 <threshold>
                      filter all (0), filter flat areas (0-30) or filter edges
                      (-30-0)

       perspective=x0:y0:x1:y1:x2:y2:x3:y3:t
              Correct the perspective of movies not  filmed  perpendicular  to
              the screen.
                 <x0>,<y0>,...
                      coordinates  of  the  top  left, top right, bottom left,
                      bottom right corners
                 <t>
                      linear (0) or cubic resampling (1)

       2xsai
              Scale and smooth the image with the 2x scale and interpolate al‐
              gorithm.

       1bpp
              1bpp bitmap to YUV/BGR 8/15/16/32 conversion

       down3dright[=lines]
              Reposition and resize stereoscopic images.  Extracts both stereo
              fields and places them side by side, resizing them  to  maintain
              the original movie aspect.
                 <lines>
                      number  of  lines to select from the middle of the image
                      (default: 12)

       bmovl=hidden:opaque:fifo
              The bitmap overlay filter reads bitmaps from a FIFO and displays
              them  on  top of the movie, allowing some transformations on the
              image.  Also see TOOLS/bmovl-test.c for a small bmovl test  pro‐
              gram.
                 <hidden>
                      Set  the  default value of the 'hidden' flag (0=visible,
                      1=hidden).
                 <opaque>
                      Set the default value of the 'opaque' flag  (0=transpar‐
                      ent, 1=opaque).
                 <fifo>
                      path/filename   for  the  FIFO  (named  pipe  connecting
                      'mplayer -vf bmovl' to the controlling application)

              FIFO commands are:
                 RGBA32 width height xpos ypos alpha clear
                      followed by width*height*4 Bytes of raw RGBA32 data.
                 ABGR32 width height xpos ypos alpha clear
                      followed by width*height*4 Bytes of raw ABGR32 data.
                 RGB24 width height xpos ypos alpha clear
                      followed by width*height*3 Bytes of raw RGB24 data.
                 BGR24 width height xpos ypos alpha clear
                      followed by width*height*3 Bytes of raw BGR24 data.
                 ALPHA width height xpos ypos alpha
                      Change alpha transparency of the specified area.
                 CLEAR width height xpos ypos
                      Clear area.
                 OPAQUE
                      Disable all alpha transparency.  Send "ALPHA 0 0 0 0  0"
                      to enable it again.
                 HIDE
                      Hide bitmap.
                 SHOW
                      Show bitmap.

              Arguments are:
                 <width>, <height>
                      image/area size
                 <xpos>, <ypos>
                      Start blitting at position x/y.
                 <alpha>
                      Set  alpha  difference.  If you set this to -255 you can
                      then send a sequence of ALPHA-commands to set  the  area
                      to -225, -200, -175 etc for a nice fade-in-effect! ;)
                         0:    same as original
                         255:  Make everything opaque.
                         -255: Make everything transparent.

                 <clear>
                      Clear the framebuffer before blitting.
                         0:  The  image will just be blitted on top of the old
                         one, so you do not need to send 1.8MB of RGBA32  data
                         every time a small part of the screen is updated.
                         1: clear

       framestep=I|[i]step
              Renders only every nth frame or every intra frame (keyframe).

              If you call the filter with I (uppercase) as the parameter, then
              only keyframes are rendered.  For DVDs it generally means one in
              every  15/12  frames  (IBBPBBPBBPBBPBB),  for AVI it means every
              scene change or every keyint value (see -lavcopts keyint=  value
              if you use MEncoder to encode the video).

              When  a  keyframe is found, an 'I!' string followed by a newline
              character is printed, leaving the current line  of  MPlayer/MEn‐
              coder  output  on  the  screen, because it contains the time (in
              seconds) and frame number of the keyframe (You can use this  in‐
              formation to split the AVI.).

              If you call the filter with a numeric parameter 'step' then only
              one in every 'step' frames is rendered.

              If you put an 'i' (lowercase) before the number then an 'I!'  is
              printed (like the I parameter).

              If  you give only the i then nothing is done to the frames, only
              I! is printed.

       tile=xtiles:ytiles:output:start:delta
              Tile a series of images into a single,  bigger  image.   If  you
              omit  a  parameter  or use a value less than 0, then the default
              value is used.  You can also stop when you  are  satisfied  (...
              -vf tile=10:5 ...).  It is probably a good idea to put the scale
              filter before the tile :-)

              The parameters are:

                 <xtiles>
                      number of tiles on the x axis (default: 5)
                 <ytiles>
                      number of tiles on the y axis (default: 5)
                 <output>
                      Render the tile  when  'output'  number  of  frames  are
                      reached,  where  'output'  should  be a number less than
                      xtile * ytile.   Missing  tiles  are  left  blank.   You
                      could,  for example, write an 8 * 7 tile every 50 frames
                      to have one image every 2 seconds @ 25 fps.
                 <start>
                      outer border thickness in pixels (default: 2)
                 <delta>
                      inner border thickness in pixels (default: 4)

       delogo[=x:y:w:h:t]
              Suppresses a TV station logo by a simple  interpolation  of  the
              surrounding  pixels.  Just set a rectangle covering the logo and
              watch it disappear (and sometimes something even uglier appear -
              your mileage may vary).
                 <x>,<y>
                      top left corner of the logo
                 <w>,<h>
                      width and height of the cleared rectangle
                 <t>  Thickness of the fuzzy edge of the rectangle (added to w
                      and h).  When set to -1, a green rectangle is  drawn  on
                      the screen to simplify finding the right x,y,w,h parame‐
                      ters.
                 file=<file>
                      You can specify a text  file  to  load  the  coordinates
                      from.   Each line must have a timestamp (in seconds, and
                      in ascending order) and the "x:y:w:h:t"  coordinates  (t
                      can be omitted).

       remove-logo=/path/to/logo_bitmap_file_name.pgm
              Suppresses  a  TV station logo, using a PGM or PPM image file to
              determine which pixels comprise the logo.  The width and  height
              of  the  image  file  must match those of the video stream being
              processed.  Uses the filter image and a circular blur  algorithm
              to remove the logo.

                 /path/to/logo_bitmap_file_name.pgm
                      [path] + filename of the filter image.

       zrmjpeg[=options]
              Software YV12 to MJPEG encoder for use with the zr2 video output
              device.

                 maxheight=<h>|maxwidth=<w>
                      These options set the maximum width and  height  the  zr
                      card can handle (the MPlayer filter layer currently can‐
                      not query those).

                 {dc10+,dc10,buz,lml33}-{PAL|NTSC}
                      Use these options to set maxwidth and maxheight automat‐
                      ically to the values known for card/mode combo.  For ex‐
                      ample, valid options are:  dc10-PAL  and  buz-NTSC  (de‐
                      fault: dc10+PAL)

                 color|bw
                      Select  color  or  black  and white encoding.  Black and
                      white encoding is faster.  Color is the default.

                 hdec={1,2,4}
                      Horizontal decimation 1, 2 or 4.

                 vdec={1,2,4}
                      Vertical decimation 1, 2 or 4.

                 quality=1-20
                      Set JPEG compression quality [BEST] 1 - 20 [VERY BAD].

                 fd|nofd
                      By default, decimation is only performed  if  the  Zoran
                      hardware  can  upscale the resulting MJPEG images to the
                      original size.  The option fd instructs  the  filter  to
                      always perform the requested decimation (ugly).

       screenshot=prefix
              Allows  acquiring screenshots of the movie using slave mode com‐
              mands that can be bound to keypresses.  See the slave mode docu‐
              mentation  and  the INTERACTIVE CONTROL section for details.  By
              default files named 'shotNNNN.png' will be saved in the  working
              directory,  using  the first available number - no files will be
              overwritten.  Specify a prefix to change the name  or  location,
              e.g.  -vf screenshot=shots/now will save the files in the direc‐
              tory shots with nowNNNN.png as name.  The filter has no overhead
              when not used and accepts an arbitrary colorspace, so it is safe
              to add it to the configuration file.  Make sure that the screen‐
              shot  filter  is  added after all other filters whose effect you
              want to record on the saved image.  E.g. it should be  the  last
              filter  if  you want to have an exact screenshot of what you see
              on the monitor.

       ass
              Moves SSA/ASS subtitle rendering to an arbitrary  point  in  the
              filter chain.  Only useful with the -ass option.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -vf ass,screenshot
                      Moves  SSA/ASS  rendering  before the screenshot filter.
                      Screenshots taken this way will contain subtitles.

       blackframe[=amount:threshold]
              Detect frames that are (almost) completely black.  Can be useful
              to detect chapter transitions or commercials.  Output lines con‐
              sist of the frame number of the detected frame,  the  percentage
              of  blackness,  the  frame type and the frame number of the last
              encountered keyframe.

                 <amount>
                      Percentage of the pixels  that  have  to  be  below  the
                      threshold (default: 98).

                 <threshold>
                      Threshold  below which a pixel value is considered black
                      (default: 32).

       stereo3d[=in:out]
              Stereo3d converts between different stereoscopic image formats.

                 <in> Stereoscopic image format of input. Possible values:
                      sbsl or side_by_side_left_first
                             side by side parallel (left eye left,  right  eye
                             right)
                      sbsr or side_by_side_right_first
                             side  by  side crosseye (right eye left, left eye
                             right)
                      sbs2l or side_by_side_half_width_left_first
                             side by side with half width resolution (left eye
                             left, right eye right)
                      sbs2r or side_by_side_half_width_right_first
                             side  by  side  with half width resolution (right
                             eye left, left eye right)
                      abl or above_below_left_first
                             above-below (left eye above, right eye below)
                      abl or above_below_right_first
                             above-below (right eye above, left eye below)
                      ab2l or above_below_half_height_left_first
                             above-below with half height resolution (left eye
                             above, right eye below)
                      ab2r or above_below_half_height_right_first
                             above-below  with  half  height resolution (right
                             eye above, left eye below)

                 <out>
                      Stereoscopic image format of output. Possible values are
                      all the input formats as well as:
                      arcg or anaglyph_red_cyan_gray
                             anaglyph  red/cyan  gray (red filter on left eye,
                             cyan filter on right eye)
                      arch or anaglyph_red_cyan_half_color
                             anaglyph red/cyan half  colored  (red  filter  on
                             left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
                      arcc or anaglyph_red_cyan_color
                             anaglyph  red/cyan color (red filter on left eye,
                             cyan filter on right eye)
                      arcd or anaglyph_red_cyan_dubois
                             anaglyph red/cyan color optimized with the  least
                             squares  projection of dubois (red filter on left
                             eye, cyan filter on right eye)
                      agmg or anaglyph_green_magenta_gray
                             anaglyph green/magenta gray (green filter on left
                             eye, magenta filter on right eye)
                      agmh or anaglyph_green_magenta_half_color
                             anaglyph green/magenta half colored (green filter
                             on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
                      agmc or anaglyph_green_magenta_color
                             anaglyph green/magenta colored (green  filter  on
                             left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
                      aybg or anaglyph_yellow_blue_gray
                             anaglyph  yellow/blue gray (yellow filter on left
                             eye, blue filter on right eye)
                      aybh or anaglyph_yellow_blue_half_color
                             anaglyph yellow/blue half colored (yellow  filter
                             on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
                      aybc or anaglyph_yellow_blue_color
                             anaglyph  yellow/blue  colored  (yellow filter on
                             left eye, blue filter on right eye)
                      irl or interleave_rows_left_first
                             Interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye
                             starts on next row)
                      irr or interleave_rows_right_first
                             Interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye
                             starts on next row)
                      ml or mono_left
                             mono output (left eye only)
                      mr or mono_right
                             mono output (right eye only)
                 NOTE: To use either of the interleaved-rows output formats to
                 display full-screen on a row-interleaved 3D display, you will
                 need to scale the video to the correct height first using the
                 "scale" filter, if it is not already the right height.  Typi‐
                 cally,   that   is   1080   rows   (so   use    e.g.     "-vf
                 scale=1440:1080,stereo3d=sbsl:irl"  for  a  720p side-by-side
                 encoded movie).

       gradfun[=strength[:radius]]
              Fix the banding artifacts that  are  sometimes  introduced  into
              nearly  flat regions by truncation to 8bit colordepth.  Interpo‐
              lates the gradients that should go  where  the  bands  are,  and
              dithers them.

              This  filter is designed for playback only.  Do not use it prior
              to lossy compression, because  compression  tends  to  lose  the
              dither and bring back the bands.

                 <strength>
                      Maximum  amount  by which the filter will change any one
                      pixel.  Also the threshold for detecting nearly flat re‐
                      gions (default: 1.2).

                 <radius>
                      Neighborhood  to  fit  the  gradient  to.  Larger radius
                      makes for smoother gradients, but also prevents the fil‐
                      ter  from  modifying  pixels  near detailed regions (de‐
                      fault: 16).

       fixpts[=options]
              Fixes the presentation timestamps (PTS) of the frames.   By  de‐
              fault,  the  PTS  passed  to the next filter is dropped, but the
              following options can change that:

                 print
                      Print the incoming PTS.

                 fps=<fps>
                      Specify a frame per second value.

                 start=<pts>
                      Specify an initial value for the PTS.

                 autostart=<n>
                      Uses the nth incoming PTS as the initial PTS.  All  pre‐
                      vious  PTS are kept, so setting a huge value or -1 keeps
                      the PTS intact.

                 autofps=<n>
                      Uses the nth incoming PTS after the end of autostart  to
                      determine the framerate.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -vf fixpts=fps=24000/1001,ass,fixpts
                      Generates  a new sequence of PTS, uses it for ASS subti‐
                      tles, then drops it.  Generating a new sequence is  use‐
                      ful  when  the  timestamps are reset during the program;
                      this is frequent on DVDs.  Dropping it may be  necessary
                      to avoid confusing encoders.

              NOTE:  Using  this filter together with any sort of seeking (in‐
              cluding -ss and EDLs) may make demons fly out of your nose.

GENERAL ENCODING OPTIONS (MENCODER ONLY)
       -audio-delay <any floating-point number>
              Delays either audio or video by setting a  delay  field  in  the
              header  (default: 0.0).  This does not delay either stream while
              encoding, but the player will see the delay field and compensate
              accordingly.  Positive values delay the audio, and negative val‐
              ues delay the video.  Note that this is the  exact  opposite  of
              the -delay option.  For example, if a video plays correctly with
              -delay 0.2, you can fix the video with MEncoder  by  using  -au‐
              dio-delay -0.2.

              Currently,  this  option  only works with the default muxer (-of
              avi).  If you are using a different muxer,  then  you  must  use
              -delay instead.

       -audio-density <1-50>
              Number  of  audio  chunks per second (default is 2 for 0.5s long
              audio chunks).
              NOTE: CBR only, VBR ignores this as it puts each packet in a new
              chunk.

       -audio-preload <0.0-2.0>
              Sets up the audio buffering time interval (default: 0.5s).

       -fafmttag <format>
              Can be used to override the audio format tag of the output file.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -fafmttag 0x55
                      Will  have  the  output file contain 0x55 (mp3) as audio
                      format tag.

       -ffourcc <fourcc>
              Can be used to override the video fourcc of the output file.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -ffourcc div3
                      Will have the output file contain 'div3' as video  four‐
                      cc.

       -force-avi-aspect <0.2-3.0>
              Override the aspect stored in the AVI OpenDML vprp header.  This
              can be used to change the aspect ratio with '-ovc copy'.

       -frameno-file <filename> (DEPRECATED)
              Specify the name of the audio  file  with  framenumber  mappings
              created  in  the first (audio only) pass of a special three pass
              encoding mode.
              NOTE: Using this mode will most likely give you A-V desync.   Do
              not  use  it.   It  is kept for backwards compatibility only and
              will possibly be removed in a future version.

       -hr-edl-seek
              Use a more precise, but much slower method for  skipping  areas.
              Areas  marked  for  skipping  are  not  seeked over, instead all
              frames are decoded, but only the necessary frames  are  encoded.
              This allows starting at non-keyframe boundaries.
              NOTE: Not guaranteed to work right with '-ovc copy'.

       -info <option1:option2:...> (AVI only)
              Specify the info header of the resulting AVI file.

              Available options are:

                 help
                      Show this description.

                 name=<value>
                      title of the work

                 artist=<value>
                      artist or author of the work

                 genre=<value>
                      original work category

                 subject=<value>
                      contents of the work

                 copyright=<value>
                      copyright information

                 srcform=<value>
                      original format of the digitized material

                 comment=<value>
                      general comments about the work

       -noautoexpand
              Do  not automatically insert the expand filter into the MEncoder
              filter chain.  Useful to control at which point  of  the  filter
              chain  subtitles  are  rendered when hardcoding subtitles onto a
              movie.

       -noencodedups
              Do not attempt to encode duplicate frames in  duplicate;  always
              output  zero-byte  frames  to  indicate  duplicates.   Zero-byte
              frames will be written anyway unless a filter or encoder capable
              of  doing duplicate encoding is loaded.  Currently the only such
              filter is harddup.

       -noodml (-of avi only)
              Do not write OpenDML index for AVI files >1GB.

       -noskip
              Do not skip frames.

       -o <filename>
              Outputs to the given filename.
              If you want a default output filename, you can put  this  option
              in the MEncoder config file.

       -oac <codec name>
              Encode with the given audio codec (no default set).
              NOTE: Use -oac help to get a list of available audio codecs.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -oac copy
                      no encoding, just streamcopy
                 -oac pcm
                      Encode to uncompressed PCM.
                 -oac mp3lame
                      Encode to MP3 (using LAME).
                 -oac lavc
                      Encode with a libavcodec codec.

       -of <format> (BETA CODE!)
              Encode to the specified container format (default: AVI).
              NOTE: Use -of help to get a list of available container formats.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -of avi
                      Encode to AVI.
                 -of mpeg
                      Encode to MPEG (also see -mpegopts).
                 -of lavf
                      Encode with libavformat muxers (also see -lavfopts).
                 -of rawvideo
                      raw video stream (no muxing - one video stream only)
                 -of rawaudio
                      raw audio stream (no muxing - one audio stream only)

       -ofps <fps>
              Specify  a  frames  per  second (fps) value for the output file,
              which can be different from that of the source  material.   Must
              be  set  for  variable  fps  (ASF,  some  MOV)  and  progressive
              (30000/1001 fps telecined MPEG) files.

       -ovc <codec name>
              Encode with the given video codec (no default set).
              NOTE: Use -ovc help to get a list of available video codecs.

              EXAMPLE:
                 -ovc copy
                      no encoding, just streamcopy
                 -ovc raw
                      Encode to an arbitrary  uncompressed  format  (use  '-vf
                      format' to select).
                 -ovc lavc
                      Encode with a libavcodec codec.

       -passlogfile <filename>
              Dump first pass information to <filename> instead of the default
              divx2pass.log in two pass encoding mode.

       -skiplimit <value>
              Specify the maximum number of frames that may be  skipped  after
              encoding one frame (-noskiplimit for unlimited).

       -vobsubout <basename>
              Specify  the  basename for the output .idx and .sub files.  This
              turns off subtitle rendering in the encoded movie and diverts it
              to VOBsub subtitle files.

       -vobsuboutid <langid>
              Specify  the  language  two letter code for the subtitles.  This
              overrides what is read from the DVD or the .ifo file.

       -vobsuboutindex <index>
              Specify the index of the subtitles in the output files (default:
              0).

       -force-key-frames <time>,<time>,...
              Force  key frames at the specified timestamps, more precisely at
              the first frame after each specified time.

              This option can be used to ensure that a seek point  is  present
              at  a  chapter  mark or any other designated place in the output
              file.

              The timestamps must be specified in ascending order.

              Since MEncoder does not send timestamps along the filter  chain,
              you  probably  need  to use the fixpts filter for this option to
              work.

              Not all codecs support forced key frames.  Currently, support is
              only implemented for the following encoders: lavc, x264, xvid.

CODEC SPECIFIC ENCODING OPTIONS (MENCODER ONLY)
       You  can specify codec specific encoding parameters using the following
       syntax:

       -<codec>opts <option1[=value1]:option2[=value2]:...>

       Where <codec> may be: lavc, xvidenc, mp3lame,  toolame,  twolame,  nuv,
       xvfw, faac, x264enc, mpeg, lavf.

   mp3lame (-lameopts)
       help
              get help

       vbr=<0-4>
              variable bitrate method
                 0    cbr
                 1    mt
                 2    rh (default)
                 3    abr
                 4    mtrh

       abr
              average bitrate

       cbr
              constant bitrate Also forces CBR mode encoding on subsequent ABR
              presets modes.

       br=<0-1024>
              bitrate in kbps (CBR and ABR only)

       q=<0-9>
              quality (0 - highest, 9 - lowest) (VBR only)

       aq=<0-9>
              algorithmic quality (0 - best/slowest, 9 - worst/fastest)

       ratio=<1-100>
              compression ratio

       vol=<0-10>
              audio input gain

       mode=<0-3>
              (default: auto)
                 0    stereo
                 1    joint-stereo
                 2    dualchannel
                 3    mono

       padding=<0-2>
                 0    none
                 1    all
                 2    adjust

       fast
              Switch on faster encoding on subsequent VBR presets modes.  This
              results in slightly lower quality and higher bitrates.

       highpassfreq=<freq>
              Set a highpass filtering frequency in Hz.  Frequencies below the
              specified one will be cut off.  A value of -1 will disable  fil‐
              tering, a value of 0 will let LAME choose values automatically.

       lowpassfreq=<freq>
              Set  a lowpass filtering frequency in Hz.  Frequencies above the
              specified one will be cut off.  A value of -1 will disable  fil‐
              tering, a value of 0 will let LAME choose values automatically.

       preset=<value>
              preset values

                 help
                      Print  additional  options and information about presets
                      settings.

                 medium
                      VBR encoding, good quality, 150-180 kbps bitrate range

                 standard
                      VBR encoding, high quality, 170-210 kbps bitrate range

                 extreme
                      VBR encoding, very high quality,  200-240  kbps  bitrate
                      range

                 insane
                      CBR encoding, highest preset quality, 320 kbps bitrate

                 <8-320>
                      ABR encoding at average given kbps bitrate

              EXAMPLES:
                 fast:preset=standard
                      suitable  for  most  people and most music types and al‐
                      ready quite high quality
                 cbr:preset=192
                      Encode with ABR presets at a 192  kbps  forced  constant
                      bitrate.
                 preset=172
                      Encode with ABR presets at a 172 kbps average bitrate.
                 preset=extreme
                      for  people  with  extremely  good  hearing  and similar
                      equipment

   toolame and twolame (-toolameopts and -twolameopts respectively)
       br=<32-384>
              In CBR mode this parameter indicates the bitrate in  kbps,  when
              in  VBR  mode  it is the minimum bitrate allowed per frame.  VBR
              mode will not work with a value below 112.

       vbr=<-50-50> (VBR only)
              variability range; if negative the encoder  shifts  the  average
              bitrate towards the lower limit, if positive towards the higher.
              When set to 0 CBR is used (default).

       maxvbr=<32-384> (VBR only)
              maximum bitrate allowed per frame, in kbps

       mode=<stereo | jstereo | mono | dual>
              (default: mono for 1-channel audio, stereo otherwise)

       psy=<-1-4>
              psychoacoustic model (default: 2)

       errprot=<0 | 1>
              Include error protection.

       debug=<0-10>
              debug level

   faac (-faacopts)
       br=<bitrate>
              average bitrate in kbps (mutually exclusive with quality)

       quality=<1-1000>
              quality mode, the higher the better (mutually exclusive with br)

       object=<1-4>
              object type complexity
                 1    MAIN (default)
                 2    LOW
                 3    SSR
                 4    LTP (extremely slow)

       mpeg=<2|4>
              MPEG version (default: 4)

       tns
              Enables temporal noise shaping.

       cutoff=<0-sampling_rate/2>
              cutoff frequency (default: sampling_rate/2)

       raw
              Stores the bitstream as raw payload with extradata in  the  con‐
              tainer  header  (default:  0,  corresponds to ADTS).  Do not set
              this flag if not explicitly required or you will not be able  to
              remux the audio stream later on.

   lavc (-lavcopts)
       Many  libavcodec (lavc for short) options are tersely documented.  Read
       the source for full details.

       EXAMPLE:
                 vcodec=msmpeg4:vbitrate=1800:vhq:keyint=250

       o=<key>=<value>[,<key>=<value>[,...]]
              Pass AVOptions to libavcodec encoder.  Note, a patch to make the
              o=  unneeded  and  pass all unknown options through the AVOption
              system is welcome.  A full list of AVOptions can be found in the
              FFmpeg  manual.  Note that some AVOptions may conflict with MEn‐
              coder options.

              EXAMPLE:
                 o=bt=100k

       acodec=<value>
              audio codec (default: mp2)
                 ac3
                      Dolby Digital (AC-3)
                 adpcm_*
                      Adaptive PCM formats - see the  HTML  documentation  for
                      details.
                 flac
                      Free Lossless Audio Codec (FLAC)
                 g726
                      G.726 ADPCM
                 libfaac
                      Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) - using FAAC
                 libmp3lame
                      MPEG-1 audio layer 3 (MP3) - using LAME
                 mp2
                      MPEG-1 audio layer 2 (MP2)
                 pcm_*
                      PCM formats - see the HTML documentation for details.
                 roq_dpcm
                      Id Software RoQ DPCM
                 sonic
                      experimental simple lossy codec
                 sonicls
                      experimental simple lossless codec
                 vorbis
                      Vorbis
                 wmav1
                      Windows Media Audio v1
                 wmav2
                      Windows Media Audio v2

       abitrate=<value>
              audio bitrate in kbps (default: 224)

       atag=<value>
              Use the specified Windows audio format tag (e.g. atag=0x55).

       bit_exact
              Use  only  bit  exact  algorithms (except (I)DCT).  Additionally
              bit_exact disables several optimizations and thus should only be
              used  for  regression  tests,  which need binary identical files
              even if the encoder version changes.  This also  suppresses  the
              user_data  header in MPEG-4 streams.  Do not use this option un‐
              less you know exactly what you are doing.

       threads=<1-16>
              Maximum number of threads to  use  (default:  1).   May  have  a
              slight negative effect on motion estimation.

       vcodec=<value>
              Employ the specified codec (default: mpeg4).
                 asv1
                      ASUS Video v1
                 asv2
                      ASUS Video v2
                 dvvideo
                      Sony Digital Video
                 ffv1
                      FFmpeg's lossless video codec
                 ffvhuff
                      nonstandard 20% smaller HuffYUV using YV12
                 flv
                      Sorenson H.263 used in Flash Video
                 h261
                      H.261
                 h263
                      H.263
                 h263p
                      H.263+
                 huffyuv
                      HuffYUV
                 libtheora
                      Theora
                 libx264
                      x264 H.264/AVC MPEG-4 Part 10
                 libxvid
                      Xvid MPEG-4 Part 2 (ASP)
                 ljpeg
                      Lossless JPEG
                 mjpeg
                      Motion JPEG
                 mpeg1video
                      MPEG-1 video
                 mpeg2video
                      MPEG-2 video
                 mpeg4
                      MPEG-4 (DivX 4/5)
                 msmpeg4
                      DivX 3
                 msmpeg4v2
                      MS MPEG4v2
                 roqvideo
                      ID Software RoQ Video
                 rv10
                      an old RealVideo codec
                 snow (also see: vstrict)
                      FFmpeg's experimental wavelet-based codec
                 svq1
                      Apple Sorenson Video 1
                 wmv1
                      Windows Media Video, version 1 (AKA WMV7)
                 wmv2
                      Windows Media Video, version 2 (AKA WMV8)

       vqmin=<1-31>
              minimum quantizer

                 1    Not  recommended  (much larger file, little quality dif‐
                      ference and weird side effects: msmpeg4,  h263  will  be
                      very low quality, ratecontrol will be confused resulting
                      in lower quality and some decoders will not be  able  to
                      decode it).

                 2    Recommended  for  normal  mpeg4/mpeg1video encoding (de‐
                      fault).

                 3    Recommended for h263(p)/msmpeg4.  The reason for prefer‐
                      ring  3 over 2 is that 2 could lead to overflows.  (This
                      will be fixed for h263(p) by changing the quantizer  per
                      MB in the future, msmpeg4 cannot be fixed as it does not
                      support that.)

       lmin=<0.01-255.0>
              Minimum frame-level Lagrange  multiplier  for  ratecontrol  (de‐
              fault: 2.0).  Lavc will rarely use quantizers below the value of
              lmin.  Lowering lmin will make lavc more likely to choose  lower
              quantizers  for  some  frames,  but  not lower than the value of
              vqmin.  Likewise, raising lmin will make  lavc  less  likely  to
              choose  low  quantizers,  even if vqmin would have allowed them.
              You probably want to set  lmin  approximately  equal  to  vqmin.
              When  adaptive  quantization  is  in use, changing lmin/lmax may
              have less of an effect; see mblmin/mblmax.

       lmax=<0.01-255.0>
              maximum Lagrange multiplier for ratecontrol (default: 31.0)

       mblmin=<0.01-255.0>
              Minimum macroblock-level  Lagrange  multiplier  for  ratecontrol
              (default:2.0).  This parameter affects adaptive quantization op‐
              tions like qprd, lumi_mask, etc..

       mblmax=<0.01-255.0>
              Maximum macroblock-level  Lagrange  multiplier  for  ratecontrol
              (default: 31.0).

       vqscale=<0-31>
              Constant  quantizer  / constant  quality encoding (selects fixed
              quantizer mode).  A lower value means better quality but  larger
              files (default: -1).  In case of snow codec, value 0 means loss‐
              less encoding.  Since the other codecs do not support this, vqs‐
              cale=0 will have an undefined effect.  1 is not recommended (see
              vqmin for details).

       vqmax=<1-31>
              Maximum quantizer, 10-31 should be a sane range (default: 31).

       vqdiff=<1-31>
              maximum quantizer difference between consecutive I- or  P-frames
              (default: 3)

       vmax_b_frames=<0-4>
              maximum number of B-frames between non-B-frames:
                 0    no B-frames (default)
                 0-2  sane range for MPEG-4

       vme=<0-5>
              motion estimation method.  Available methods are:
                 0    none (very low quality)
                 1    full (slow, currently unmaintained and disabled)
                 2    log (low quality, currently unmaintained and disabled)
                 3    phods (low quality, currently unmaintained and disabled)
                 4    EPZS: size=1 diamond, size can be adjusted with the *dia
                      options (default)
                 5    X1 (experimental, currently aliased to EPZS)
                 8    iter (iterative overlapped block, only used in snow)

              NOTE: 0-3 currently ignores the amount of bits spent, so quality
              may be low.

       me_range=<0-9999>
              motion estimation search range (default: 0 (unlimited))

       mbd=<0-2> (also see *cmp, qpel)
              Macroblock  decision  algorithm (high quality mode), encode each
              macro block in all modes and choose the best.  This is slow  but
              results  in  better quality and file size.  When mbd is set to 1
              or 2, the value of mbcmp is ignored when  comparing  macroblocks
              (the  mbcmp  value is still used in other places though, in par‐
              ticular the motion search algorithms).  If any  comparison  set‐
              ting  (precmp,  subcmp,  cmp,  or  mbcmp) is nonzero, however, a
              slower but better half-pel motion search will be  used,  regard‐
              less  of what mbd is set to.  If qpel is set, quarter-pel motion
              search will be used regardless.
                 0    Use comparison function given by mbcmp (default).
                 1    Select the MB mode which needs the fewest bits (=vhq).
                 2    Select the MB mode which has the best rate distortion.

       vhq
              Same as mbd=1, kept for compatibility reasons.

       v4mv
              Allow 4 motion vectors per macroblock (slightly better quality).
              Works better if used with mbd>0.

       obmc
              overlapped block motion compensation (H.263+)

       loop
              loop filter (H.263+) note, this is broken

       keyint=<0-300>
              maximum  interval  between  keyframes in frames (default: 250 or
              one keyframe every ten seconds in a 25fps movie.   This  is  the
              recommended  default  for  MPEG-4).  Most codecs require regular
              keyframes in order to limit the accumulation of mismatch  error.
              Keyframes are also needed for seeking, as seeking is only possi‐
              ble to a keyframe - but keyframes need  more  space  than  other
              frames,  so  larger numbers here mean slightly smaller files but
              less precise seeking.  0 is equivalent to 1, which  makes  every
              frame a keyframe.  Values >300 are not recommended as the quali‐
              ty might be bad depending upon decoder, encoder and luck.  It is
              common for MPEG-1/2 to use values <=30.

       sc_threshold=<-1000000000-1000000000>
              Threshold for scene change detection.  A keyframe is inserted by
              libavcodec when it detects a scene change.  You can specify  the
              sensitivity  of  the  detection  with  this option.  -1000000000
              means  there  is  a  scene  change  detected  at  every   frame,
              1000000000 means no scene changes are detected (default: 0).

       sc_factor=<any positive integer>
              Causes  frames with higher quantizers to be more likely to trig‐
              ger a scene change detection and make libavcodec use an  I-frame
              (default: 1).  1-16 is a sane range.  Values between 2 and 6 may
              yield increasing PSNR (up to approximately 0.04 dB)  and  better
              placement of I-frames in high-motion scenes.  Higher values than
              6 may give very slightly better PSNR (approximately 0.01 dB more
              than sc_factor=6), but noticably worse visual quality.

       vb_strategy=<0-2> (pass one only)
              strategy to choose between I/P/B-frames:
                 0    Always use the maximum number of B-frames (default).
                 1    Avoid  B-frames in high motion scenes.  See the b_sensi‐
                      tivity option to tune this strategy.
                 2    Places B-frames more or less optimally to yield  maximum
                      quality  (slower).  You may want to reduce the speed im‐
                      pact of this option by tuning the option brd_scale.

       b_sensitivity=<any integer greater than 0>
              Adjusts how sensitively vb_strategy=1 detects motion and  avoids
              using  B-frames  (default: 40).  Lower sensitivities will result
              in more B-frames.  Using more B-frames  usually  improves  PSNR,
              but  too  many  B-frames can hurt quality in high-motion scenes.
              Unless there is an extremely high amount of motion, b_sensitivi‐
              ty  can  safely be lowered below the default; 10 is a reasonable
              value in most cases.

       brd_scale=<0-10>
              Downscales frames for dynamic  B-frame  decision  (default:  0).
              Each  time  brd_scale  is increased by one, the frame dimensions
              are divided by two, which improves speed by a  factor  of  four.
              Both  dimensions of the fully downscaled frame must be even num‐
              bers, so brd_scale=1 requires the original dimensions to be mul‐
              tiples  of  four,  brd_scale=2 requires multiples of eight, etc.
              In other words, the dimensions of the original frame  must  both
              be divisible by 2^(brd_scale+1) with no remainder.

       bidir_refine=<0-4>
              Refine the two motion vectors used in bidirectional macroblocks,
              rather than re-using  vectors  from  the  forward  and  backward
              searches.  This option has no effect without B-frames.
                 0    Disabled (default).
                 1-4  Use a wider search (larger values are slower).

       vpass=<1-3>
              Activates  internal two (or more) pass mode, only specify if you
              wish to use two (or more) pass encoding.
                 1    first pass (also see turbo)
                 2    second pass
                 3    Nth pass (second and subsequent passes of N-pass  encod‐
                      ing)
              Here is how it works, and how to use it:
              The  first pass (vpass=1) writes the statistics file.  You might
              want to deactivate some CPU-hungry options,  like  "turbo"  mode
              does.
              In two pass mode, the second pass (vpass=2) reads the statistics
              file and bases ratecontrol decisions on it.
              In N-pass mode, the second pass (vpass=3, that is  not  a  typo)
              does  both: It first reads the statistics, then overwrites them.
              You might want to backup  divx2pass.log  before  doing  this  if
              there  is any possibility that you will have to cancel MEncoder.
              You can use all encoding options, except very CPU-hungry options
              like "qns".
              You  can  run this same pass over and over to refine the encode.
              Each subsequent pass will use the statistics from  the  previous
              pass  to improve.  The final pass can include any CPU-hungry en‐
              coding options.
              If you want a  2  pass  encode,  use  first  vpass=1,  and  then
              vpass=2.
              If  you  want a 3 or more pass encode, use vpass=1 for the first
              pass and then vpass=3 and then vpass=3 again and again until you
              are satisfied with the encode.

              huffyuv:
                 pass 1
                      Saves statistics.
                 pass 2
                      Encodes with an optimal Huffman table based upon statis‐
                      tics from the first pass.

       turbo (two pass only)
              Dramatically speeds up pass one using faster algorithms and dis‐
              abling  CPU-intensive options.  This will probably reduce global
              PSNR a little bit (around 0.01dB) and  change  individual  frame
              type and PSNR a little bit more (up to 0.03dB).

       aspect=<x/y>
              Store  movie aspect internally, just like with MPEG files.  Much
              nicer than rescaling, because quality is  not  decreased.   Only
              MPlayer will play these files correctly, other players will dis‐
              play them with wrong aspect.  The aspect parameter can be  given
              as a ratio or a floating point number.

              EXAMPLE:
                 aspect=16/9 or aspect=1.78

       autoaspect
              Same  as  the  aspect option, but automatically computes aspect,
              taking into account all the adjustments (crop/expand/scale/etc.)
              made in the filter chain.  Does not incur a performance penalty,
              so you can safely leave it always on.

       vbitrate=<value>
              Specify bitrate (default: 800).
              WARNING: 1kbit = 1000 bits
                 4-16000
                      (in kbit)
                 16001-24000000
                      (in bit)

       vratetol=<value>
              approximated file size tolerance in kbit.  1000-100000 is a sane
              range.  (warning: 1kbit = 1000 bits) (default: 8000)
              NOTE: vratetol should not be too large during the second pass or
              there might be problems if vrc_(min|max)rate is used.

       vrc_maxrate=<value>
              maximum bitrate in kbit/sec (default: 0, unlimited)

       vrc_minrate=<value>
              minimum bitrate in kbit/sec (default: 0, unlimited)

       vrc_buf_size=<value>
              buffer size in kbit For MPEG-1/2 this also sets the  vbv  buffer
              size, use 327 for VCD, 917 for SVCD and 1835 for DVD.

       vrc_buf_aggressivity
              currently useless

       vrc_strategy
              Ratecontrol method.  Note that some of the ratecontrol-affecting
              options will have no effect if vrc_strategy is not set to 0.
                 0    Use internal lavc ratecontrol (default).
                 1    Use Xvid ratecontrol (experimental; requires MEncoder to
                      be compiled with support for Xvid 1.1 or higher).

       vb_qfactor=<-31.0-31.0>
              quantizer factor between B- and non-B-frames (default: 1.25)

       vi_qfactor=<-31.0-31.0>
              quantizer factor between I- and non-I-frames (default: 0.8)

       vb_qoffset=<-31.0-31.0>
              quantizer offset between B- and non-B-frames (default: 1.25)

       vi_qoffset=<-31.0-31.0>
              (default: 0.0)
              if v{b|i}_qfactor > 0
              I/B-frame  quantizer  =  P-frame  quantizer  *  v{b|i}_qfactor +
              v{b|i}_qoffset
              else
              do normal ratecontrol (do not lock to  next  P-frame  quantizer)
              and set q= -q * v{b|i}_qfactor + v{b|i}_qoffset
              HINT:  To do constant quantizer encoding with different quantiz‐
              ers for I/P- and B-frames you can  use:  lmin=  <ip_quant>:lmax=
              <ip_quant>:vb_qfactor= <b_quant/ip_quant>.

       vqblur=<0.0-1.0> (pass one)
              Quantizer  blur  (default:  0.5), larger values will average the
              quantizer more over time (slower change).
                 0.0  Quantizer blur disabled.
                 1.0  Average the quantizer over all previous frames.

       vqblur=<0.0-99.0> (pass two)
              Quantizer gaussian blur (default: 0.5), larger values will aver‐
              age the quantizer more over time (slower change).

       vqcomp=<0.0-1.0>
              Quantizer  compression, vrc_eq depends upon this (default: 0.5).
              NOTE: Perceptual quality will be optimal  somewhere  in  between
              the range's extremes.

       vrc_eq=<equation>
              main ratecontrol equation

                 1+(tex/avgTex-1)*qComp
                      approximately the equation of the old ratecontrol code

                 tex^qComp
                      with qcomp 0.5 or something like that (default)

              infix operators:

                 +,-,*,/,^

              variables:

                 tex
                      texture complexity

                 iTex,pTex
                      intra, non-intra texture complexity

                 avgTex
                      average texture complexity

                 avgIITex
                      average intra texture complexity in I-frames

                 avgPITex
                      average intra texture complexity in P-frames

                 avgPPTex
                      average non-intra texture complexity in P-frames

                 avgBPTex
                      average non-intra texture complexity in B-frames

                 mv
                      bits used for motion vectors

                 fCode
                      maximum length of motion vector in log2 scale

                 iCount
                      number of intra macroblocks / number of macroblocks

                 var
                      spatial complexity

                 mcVar
                      temporal complexity

                 qComp
                      qcomp from the command line

                 isI, isP, isB
                      Is 1 if picture type is I/P/B else 0.

                 Pi,E
                      See your favorite math book.

              functions:

                 max(a,b),min(a,b)
                      maximum / minimum

                 gt(a,b)
                      is 1 if a>b, 0 otherwise

                 lt(a,b)
                      is 1 if a<b, 0 otherwise

                 eq(a,b)
                      is 1 if a==b, 0 otherwise

                 sin, cos, tan, sinh, cosh, tanh, exp, log, abs

       vrc_override=<options>
              User  specified  quality  for  specific  parts (ending, credits,
              ...).   The  options  are  <start-frame>,  <end-frame>,  <quali‐
              ty>[/<start-frame>, <end-frame>, <quality>[/...]]:
                 quality (2-31)
                      quantizer
                 quality (-500-0)
                      quality correction in %

       vrc_init_cplx=<0-1000>
              initial complexity (pass 1)

       vrc_init_occupancy=<0.0-1.0>
              initial  buffer  occupancy,  as  a fraction of vrc_buf_size (de‐
              fault: 0.9)

       vqsquish=<0|1>
              Specify how to keep the quantizer between qmin and qmax.
                 0    Use clipping.
                 1    Use a nice differentiable function (default).

       vlelim=<-1000-1000>
              Sets single coefficient  elimination  threshold  for  luminance.
              Negative values will also consider the DC coefficient (should be
              at least -4 or lower for encoding at quant=1):
                 0    disabled (default)
                 -4   JVT recommendation

       vcelim=<-1000-1000>
              Sets single coefficient elimination threshold  for  chrominance.
              Negative values will also consider the DC coefficient (should be
              at least -4 or lower for encoding at quant=1):
                 0    disabled (default)
                 7    JVT recommendation

       vstrict=<-2|-1|0|1>
              strict standard compliance
                 0    disabled
                 1    Only recommended if you want to feed the output into the
                      MPEG-4 reference decoder.
                 -1   Allow libavcodec specific extensions (default).
                 -2   Enables  experimental  codecs and features which may not
                      be playable with future MPlayer versions (snow).

       vdpart
              Data partitioning.  Adds 2 Bytes per video packet, improves  er‐
              ror-resistance  when transferring over unreliable channels (e.g.
              streaming over the internet).  Each video packet will be encoded
              in 3 separate partitions:
                 1. MVs
                      movement
                 2. DC coefficients
                      low res picture
                 3. AC coefficients
                      details
              MV  &  DC  are  most important, losing them looks far worse than
              losing the AC and the 1. & 2. partition.   (MV  &  DC)  are  far
              smaller  than the 3. partition (AC) meaning that errors will hit
              the AC partition much more often than the MV  &  DC  partitions.
              Thus,  the picture will look better with partitioning than with‐
              out, as without partitioning an error will trash AC/DC/MV equal‐
              ly.

       vpsize=<0-10000> (also see vdpart)
              Video packet size, improves error-resistance.
                 0
                      disabled (default)
                 100-1000
                      good choice

       ss
              slice structured mode for H.263+

       gray
              grayscale only encoding (faster)

       vfdct=<0-10>
              DCT algorithm
                 0    Automatically select a good one (default).
                 1    fast integer
                 2    accurate integer
                 3    MMX
                 4    mlib
                 5    AltiVec
                 6    floating point AAN

       idct=<0-99>
              IDCT algorithm
              NOTE:  To  the best of our knowledge all these IDCTs do pass the
              IEEE1180 tests.
                 0    Automatically select a good one (default).
                 1    JPEG reference integer
                 2    simple
                 3    simplemmx
                 4    libmpeg2mmx (inaccurate, do not use  for  encoding  with
                      keyint >100)
                 5    ps2
                 6    mlib
                 7    arm
                 8    AltiVec
                 9    sh4
                 10   simplearm
                 11   H.264
                 12   VP3
                 13   IPP
                 14   xvidmmx
                 15   CAVS
                 16   simplearmv5te
                 17   simplearmv6

       lumi_mask=<0.0-1.0>
              Luminance  masking is a 'psychosensory' setting that is supposed
              to make use of the fact that the human eye tends to notice fewer
              details  in very bright parts of the picture.  Luminance masking
              compresses bright areas stronger than medium ones,  so  it  will
              save bits that can be spent again on other frames, raising over‐
              all subjective quality, while possibly reducing PSNR.
              WARNING: Be careful, overly large values  can  cause  disastrous
              things.
              WARNING:  Large  values might look good on some monitors but may
              look horrible on other monitors.
                 0.0
                      disabled (default)
                 0.0-0.3
                      sane range

       dark_mask=<0.0-1.0>
              Darkness masking is a 'psychosensory' setting that  is  supposed
              to make use of the fact that the human eye tends to notice fewer
              details in very dark parts of  the  picture.   Darkness  masking
              compresses dark areas stronger than medium ones, so it will save
              bits that can be spent again on other  frames,  raising  overall
              subjective quality, while possibly reducing PSNR.
              WARNING:  Be  careful,  overly large values can cause disastrous
              things.
              WARNING: Large values might look good on some monitors  but  may
              look horrible on other monitors / TV / TFT.
                 0.0
                      disabled (default)
                 0.0-0.3
                      sane range

       tcplx_mask=<0.0-1.0>
              Temporal  complexity masking (default: 0.0 (disabled)).  Imagine
              a scene with a bird flying across the  whole  scene;  tcplx_mask
              will  raise  the  quantizers of the bird's macroblocks (thus de‐
              creasing their quality), as the human eye usually does not  have
              time  to  see  all  the  bird's  details.  Be warned that if the
              masked object stops (e.g. the bird lands) it is likely  to  look
              horrible  for  a short period of time, until the encoder figures
              out that the object is not moving and needs refined blocks.  The
              saved  bits will be spent on other parts of the video, which may
              increase subjective quality, provided that tcplx_mask  is  care‐
              fully chosen.

       scplx_mask=<0.0-1.0>
              Spatial  complexity masking.  Larger values help against blocki‐
              ness, if no deblocking filter is used  for  decoding,  which  is
              maybe not a good idea.
              Imagine a scene with grass (which usually has great spatial com‐
              plexity), a blue sky and a  house;  scplx_mask  will  raise  the
              quantizers of the grass' macroblocks, thus decreasing its quali‐
              ty, in order to spend more bits on the sky and the house.
              HINT: Crop any black borders completely as they will reduce  the
              quality of the macroblocks (also applies without scplx_mask).
                 0.0
                      disabled (default)
                 0.0-0.5
                      sane range

              NOTE: This setting does not have the same effect as using a cus‐
              tom matrix that would compress high frequencies harder,  as  sc‐
              plx_mask  will reduce the quality of P blocks even if only DC is
              changing.  The result of scplx_mask will probably  not  look  as
              good.

       p_mask=<0.0-1.0> (also see vi_qfactor)
              Reduces  the quality of inter blocks.  This is equivalent to in‐
              creasing the quality of intra blocks, because the  same  average
              bitrate  will be distributed by the rate controller to the whole
              video sequence (default: 0.0  (disabled)).   p_mask=1.0  doubles
              the bits allocated to each intra block.

       border_mask=<0.0-1.0>
              border-processing  for  MPEG-style  encoders.  Border processing
              increases the quantizer for  macroblocks  which  are  less  than
              1/5th  of  the  frame  width/height  away from the frame border,
              since they are often visually less important.

       naq
              Normalize  adaptive  quantization  (experimental).   When  using
              adaptive quantization (*_mask), the average per-MB quantizer may
              no longer match the requested frame-level quantizer.   Naq  will
              attempt  to  adjust the per-MB quantizers to maintain the proper
              average.

       ildct
              Use interlaced DCT.

       ilme
              Use interlaced motion estimation (mutually exclusive with qpel).

       alt
              Use alternative scantable.

       top=<-1-1>
                 -1   automatic
                 0    bottom field first
                 1    top field first

       format=<value>
                 YV12
                      default
                 444P
                      for ffv1
                 422P
                      for HuffYUV, lossless JPEG, dv and ffv1
                 411P
                      for lossless JPEG, dv and ffv1
                 YVU9
                      for lossless JPEG, ffv1 and svq1
                 BGR32
                      for lossless JPEG and ffv1

       pred
              (for HuffYUV)
                 0    left prediction
                 1    plane/gradient prediction
                 2    median prediction

       pred
              (for lossless JPEG)
                 0    left prediction
                 1    top prediction
                 2    topleft prediction
                 3    plane/gradient prediction
                 6    mean prediction

       coder
              (for ffv1)
                 0    vlc coding (Golomb-Rice)
                 1    arithmetic coding (CABAC)

       context
              (for ffv1)
                 0    small context model
                 1    large context model

              (for ffvhuff)
                 0    predetermined Huffman tables (builtin or two pass)
                 1    adaptive Huffman tables

       qpel
              Use quarter pel motion  compensation  (mutually  exclusive  with
              ilme).
              HINT: This seems only useful for high bitrate encodings.

       mbcmp=<0-2000>
              Sets  the  comparison  function for the macroblock decision, has
              only an effect if mbd=0.  This is  also  used  for  some  motion
              search  functions,  in which case it has an effect regardless of
              mbd setting.
                 0 (SAD)
                      sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
                 1 (SSE)
                      sum of squared errors
                 2 (SATD)
                      sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
                 3 (DCT)
                      sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
                 4 (PSNR)
                      sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
                 5 (BIT)
                      number of bits needed for the block
                 6 (RD)
                      rate distortion optimal, slow
                 7 (ZERO)
                      0
                 8 (VSAD)
                      sum of absolute vertical differences
                 9 (VSSE)
                      sum of squared vertical differences
                 10 (NSSE)
                      noise preserving sum of squared differences
                 11 (W53)
                      5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
                 12 (W97)
                      9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
                 +256
                      Also use chroma, currently  does  not  work  (correctly)
                      with B-frames.

       ildctcmp=<0-2000>
              Sets  the  comparison  function for interlaced DCT decision (see
              mbcmp for available comparison functions).

       precmp=<0-2000>
              Sets the comparison function for motion estimation pre pass (see
              mbcmp for available comparison functions) (default: 0).

       cmp=<0-2000>
              Sets the comparison function for full pel motion estimation (see
              mbcmp for available comparison functions) (default: 0).

       subcmp=<0-2000>
              Sets the comparison function for sub pel motion estimation  (see
              mbcmp for available comparison functions) (default: 0).

       skipcmp=<0-2000>
              FIXME: Document this.

       nssew=<0-1000000>
              This setting controls NSSE weight, where larger weights will re‐
              sult in more noise.  0 NSSE is identical to  SSE  You  may  find
              this  useful  if  you  prefer to keep some noise in your encoded
              video rather than filtering it away  before  encoding  (default:
              8).

       predia=<-99-6>
              diamond type and size for motion estimation pre-pass

       dia=<-99-6>
              Diamond  type & size for motion estimation.  Motion search is an
              iterative process.  Using a small diamond  does  not  limit  the
              search  to  finding only small motion vectors.  It is just some‐
              what more likely to stop before finding  the  very  best  motion
              vector,  especially when noise is involved.  Bigger diamonds al‐
              low a wider search for the best motion vector, thus  are  slower
              but result in better quality.
              Big  normal diamonds are better quality than shape-adaptive dia‐
              monds.
              Shape-adaptive diamonds are a good tradeoff  between  speed  and
              quality.
              NOTE:  The  sizes of the normal diamonds and shape adaptive ones
              do not have the same meaning.

                 -3   shape adaptive (fast) diamond with size 3

                 -2   shape adaptive (fast) diamond with size 2

                 -1   uneven multi-hexagon search (slow)

                 1    normal size=1 diamond (default) =EPZS type diamond
                            0
                           000
                            0

                 2    normal size=2 diamond
                            0
                           000
                          00000
                           000
                            0

       trell
              Trellis searched quantization.  This will find the  optimal  en‐
              coding  for  each  8x8  block.  Trellis searched quantization is
              quite simply an optimal quantization in the PSNR versus  bitrate
              sense  (Assuming  that  there would be no rounding errors intro‐
              duced by the IDCT, which is obviously not the case.).  It simply
              finds a block for the minimum of error and lambda*bits.
                 lambda
                      quantization parameter (QP) dependent constant
                 bits
                      amount of bits needed to encode the block
                 error
                      sum of squared errors of the quantization

       cbp
              Rate  distorted  optimal  coded  block pattern.  Will select the
              coded block pattern which minimizes  distortion  +  lambda*rate.
              This can only be used together with trellis quantization.

       mv0
              Try  to  encode each MB with MV=<0,0> and choose the better one.
              This has no effect if mbd=0.

       mv0_threshold=<any non-negative integer>
              When surrounding motion vectors are <0,0> and the motion estima‐
              tion  score  of  the  current  block is less than mv0_threshold,
              <0,0> is used for the motion vector and further  motion  estima‐
              tion is skipped (default: 256).  Lowering mv0_threshold to 0 can
              give a slight (0.01dB) PSNR increase and possibly make  the  en‐
              coded video look slightly better; raising mv0_threshold past 320
              results in diminished PSNR and visual  quality.   Higher  values
              speed up encoding very slightly (usually less than 1%, depending
              on the other options used).
              NOTE: This option does not require mv0 to be enabled.

       qprd (mbd=2 only)
              rate distorted optimal quantization parameter (QP) for the given
              lambda of each macroblock

       last_pred=<0-99>
              amount of motion predictors from the previous frame
                 0    (default)
                 a    Will  use 2a+1 x 2a+1 macroblock square of motion vector
                      predictors from the previous frame.

       preme=<0-2>
              motion estimation pre-pass
                 0    disabled
                 1    only after I-frames (default)
                 2    always

       subq=<1-8>
              subpel refinement quality (for qpel) (default: 8 (high quality))
              NOTE: This has a significant effect on speed.

       refs=<1-8>
              number of reference frames to consider for  motion  compensation
              (Snow only) (default: 1)

       psnr
              print  the PSNR (peak signal to noise ratio) for the whole video
              after encoding and store the per frame PSNR in  a  file  with  a
              name  like  'psnr_hhmmss.log'.  Returned values are in dB (deci‐
              bel), the higher the better.

       mpeg_quant
              Use MPEG quantizers instead of H.263.

       aic
              Enable AC prediction for MPEG-4 or advanced intra prediction for
              H.263+.  This will improve quality very slightly (around 0.02 dB
              PSNR) and slow down encoding very slightly (about 1%).
              NOTE: vqmin should be 8 or larger for H.263+ AIC.

       aiv
              alternative inter vlc for H.263+

       umv
              unlimited MVs (H.263+ only) Allows encoding of arbitrarily  long
              MVs.

       ibias=<-256-256>
              intra  quantizer  bias (256 equals 1.0, MPEG style quantizer de‐
              fault: 96, H.263 style quantizer default: 0)
              NOTE: The H.263 MMX quantizer cannot handle positive biases (set
              vfdct=1 or 2), the MPEG MMX quantizer cannot handle negative bi‐
              ases (set vfdct=1 or 2).

       pbias=<-256-256>
              inter quantizer bias (256 equals 1.0, MPEG style  quantizer  de‐
              fault: 0, H.263 style quantizer default: -64)
              NOTE: The H.263 MMX quantizer cannot handle positive biases (set
              vfdct=1 or 2), the MPEG MMX quantizer cannot handle negative bi‐
              ases (set vfdct=1 or 2).
              HINT:  A  more positive bias (-32 - -16 instead of -64) seems to
              improve the PSNR.

       nr=<0-100000>
              Noise reduction, 0 means disabled.  0-600 is a useful range  for
              typical  content,  but you may want to turn it up a bit more for
              very noisy content (default: 0).   Given  its  small  impact  on
              speed, you might want to prefer to use this over filtering noise
              away with video filters like denoise3d or hqdn3d.

       qns=<0-3>
              Quantizer noise shaping.  Rather than choosing  quantization  to
              most closely match the source video in the PSNR sense, it choos‐
              es quantization such that noise (usually ringing) will be masked
              by  similar-frequency  content  in the image.  Larger values are
              slower but may not result  in  better  quality.   This  can  and
              should be used together with trellis quantization, in which case
              the trellis quantization (optimal for constant weight)  will  be
              used as startpoint for the iterative search.
                 0    disabled (default)
                 1    Only lower the absolute value of coefficients.
                 2    Only  change coefficients before the last non-zero coef‐
                      ficient + 1.
                 3    Try all.

       inter_matrix=<comma separated matrix>
              Use custom inter matrix.  It needs a comma separated  string  of
              64 integers.

       intra_matrix=<comma separated matrix>
              Use  custom  intra matrix.  It needs a comma separated string of
              64 integers.

       vqmod_amp
              experimental quantizer modulation

       vqmod_freq
              experimental quantizer modulation

       dc
              intra DC  precision  in  bits  (default:  8).   If  you  specify
              vcodec=mpeg2video this value can be 8, 9, 10 or 11.

       cgop (also see sc_threshold)
              Close  all GOPs.  Currently it only works if scene change detec‐
              tion is disabled (sc_threshold=1000000000).

       gmc
              Enable Global Motion Compensation.

       (no)lowdelay
              Sets the low delay flag for MPEG-1/2 (disables B-frames).

       vglobal=<0-3>
              Control writing global video headers.
                 0    Codec decides where to write global headers (default).
                 1    Write global  headers  only  in  extradata  (needed  for
                      .mp4/MOV/NUT).
                 2    Write global headers only in front of keyframes.
                 3    Combine 1 and 2.

       aglobal=<0-3>
              Same as vglobal for audio headers.

       level=<value>
              Set  CodecContext  Level.   Use  31  or  41  to  play video on a
              Playstation 3.

       skip_exp=<0-1000000>
              FIXME: Document this.

       skip_factor=<0-1000000>
              FIXME: Document this.

       skip_threshold=<0-1000000>
              FIXME: Document this.

   nuv (-nuvopts)
       Nuppel video is based on RTJPEG and LZO.  By default frames  are  first
       encoded with RTJPEG and then compressed with LZO, but it is possible to
       disable either or both of the two passes.  As a result, you can in fact
       output  raw  i420, LZO compressed i420, RTJPEG, or the default LZO com‐
       pressed RTJPEG.
       NOTE: The nuvrec documentation contains some advice and examples  about
       the settings to use for the most common TV encodings.

       c=<0-20>
              chrominance threshold (default: 1)

       l=<0-20>
              luminance threshold (default: 1)

       lzo
              Enable LZO compression (default).

       nolzo
              Disable LZO compression.

       q=<3-255>
              quality level (default: 255)

       raw
              Disable RTJPEG encoding.

       rtjpeg
              Enable RTJPEG encoding (default).

   xvidenc (-xvidencopts)
       There are three modes available: constant bitrate (CBR), fixed quantiz‐
       er and two pass.

       pass=<1|2>
              Specify the pass in two pass mode.

       turbo (two pass only)
              Dramatically speeds up pass one using faster algorithms and dis‐
              abling  CPU-intensive options.  This will probably reduce global
              PSNR a little bit and change individual frame type  and  PSNR  a
              little bit more.

       bitrate=<value> (CBR or two pass mode)
              Sets  the  bitrate  to  be  used in kbits/second if <16000 or in
              bits/second if >16000.  If <value> is negative,  Xvid  will  use
              its  absolute  value as the target size (in kBytes) of the video
              and compute the associated bitrate automagically  (default:  687
              kbits/s).

       fixed_quant=<1-31>
              Switch  to  fixed quantizer mode and specify the quantizer to be
              used.

       zones=<zone0>[/<zone1>[/...]] (CBR or two pass mode)
              User specified quality  for  specific  parts  (ending,  credits,
              ...).   Each  zone  is <start-frame>,<mode>,<value> where <mode>
              may be
                 q    Constant quantizer override, where value=<2.0-31.0> rep‐
                      resents the quantizer value.
                 w    Ratecontrol  weight  override,  where  value=<0.01-2.00>
                      represents the quality correction in %.

              EXAMPLE:
                 zones=90000,q,20
                      Encodes all frames starting with frame 90000 at constant
                      quantizer 20.
                 zones=0,w,0.1/10001,w,1.0/90000,q,20
                      Encode  frames  0-10000  at  10%  bitrate, encode frames
                      90000 up to the end at constant quantizer 20.  Note that
                      the  second zone is needed to delimit the first zone, as
                      without it everything up until frame 89999 would be  en‐
                      coded at 10% bitrate.

       me_quality=<0-6>
              This option controls the motion estimation subsystem.  The high‐
              er the value, the more precise the  estimation  should  be  (de‐
              fault:  6).  The more precise the motion estimation is, the more
              bits can be saved.  Precision is gained at the  expense  of  CPU
              time so decrease this setting if you need realtime encoding.

       (no)qpel
              MPEG-4  uses a half pixel precision for its motion search by de‐
              fault.  The standard proposes a mode where encoders are  allowed
              to  use quarter pixel precision.  This option usually results in
              a sharper image.  Unfortunately it has a great impact on bitrate
              and sometimes the higher bitrate use will prevent it from giving
              a better image quality at a fixed bitrate.  It is better to test
              with  and  without this option and see whether it is worth acti‐
              vating.

       (no)gmc
              Enable Global Motion Compensation,  which  makes  Xvid  generate
              special  frames (GMC-frames) which are well suited for Pan/Zoom/
              Rotating images.  Whether or not the use  of  this  option  will
              save bits is highly dependent on the source material.

       (no)trellis
              Trellis  Quantization  is a kind of adaptive quantization method
              that saves bits by modifying quantized coefficients to make them
              more compressible by the entropy encoder.  Its impact on quality
              is good, and if VHQ uses too much CPU for you, this setting  can
              be  a  good  alternative to save a few bits (and gain quality at
              fixed bitrate) at a lesser cost than with VHQ (default: on).

       (no)cartoon
              Activate this if your encoded sequence is an anime/cartoon.   It
              modifies  some Xvid internal thresholds so Xvid takes better de‐
              cisions on frame types and motion vectors for flat looking  car‐
              toons.

       (no)chroma_me
              The  usual  motion  estimation algorithm uses only the luminance
              information to find the best motion vector.   However  for  some
              video  material,  using  the  chroma planes can help find better
              vectors.  This setting toggles the use of chroma planes for  mo‐
              tion estimation (default: on).

       (no)chroma_opt
              Enable a chroma optimizer prefilter.  It will do some extra mag‐
              ic on color information to minimize the stepped-stairs effect on
              edges.   It  will improve quality at the cost of encoding speed.
              It reduces PSNR by nature, as the mathematical deviation to  the
              original picture will get bigger, but the subjective image qual‐
              ity will raise.  Since it  works  with  color  information,  you
              might want to turn it off when encoding in grayscale.

       (no)hq_ac
              Activates  high-quality  prediction of AC coefficients for intra
              frames from neighbor blocks (default: on).

       vhq=<0-4>
              The motion search algorithm is based on a search  in  the  usual
              color  domain  and  tries to find a motion vector that minimizes
              the difference between  the  reference  frame  and  the  encoded
              frame.  With this setting activated, Xvid will also use the fre‐
              quency domain (DCT) to search for a motion vector that minimizes
              not  only the spatial difference but also the encoding length of
              the block.  Fastest to slowest:
                 0    off
                 1    mode decision (inter/intra MB) (default)
                 2    limited search
                 3    medium search
                 4    wide search

       (no)lumi_mask
              Adaptive quantization allows the macroblock quantizers  to  vary
              inside  each  frame.   This is a 'psychosensory' setting that is
              supposed to make use of the fact that the human eye tends to no‐
              tice  fewer  details  in  very bright and very dark parts of the
              picture.  It compresses those areas more  strongly  than  medium
              ones,  which  will  save  bits  that can be spent again on other
              frames, raising overall subjective quality and possibly reducing
              PSNR.

       (no)grayscale
              Make  Xvid  discard  chroma  planes  so  the  encoded  video  is
              grayscale only.  Note that this does not speed up  encoding,  it
              just  prevents  chroma data from being written in the last stage
              of encoding.

       (no)interlacing
              Encode the fields of interlaced video material.  Turn  this  op‐
              tion on for interlaced content.
              NOTE: Should you rescale the video, you would need an interlace-
              aware   resizer,   which   you    can    activate    with    -vf
              scale=<width>:<height>:1.

       min_iquant=<0-31>
              minimum I-frame quantizer (default: 2)

       max_iquant=<0-31>
              maximum I-frame quantizer (default: 31)

       min_pquant=<0-31>
              minimum P-frame quantizer (default: 2)

       max_pquant=<0-31>
              maximum P-frame quantizer (default: 31)

       min_bquant=<0-31>
              minimum B-frame quantizer (default: 2)

       max_bquant=<0-31>
              maximum B-frame quantizer (default: 31)

       min_key_interval=<value> (two pass only)
              minimum interval between keyframes (default: 0)

       max_key_interval=<value>
              maximum interval between keyframes (default: 10*fps)

       quant_type=<h263|mpeg>
              Sets  the type of quantizer to use.  For high bitrates, you will
              find that MPEG quantization preserves more detail.  For low  bi‐
              trates,  the  smoothing of H.263 will give you less block noise.
              When using custom matrices, MPEG quantization must be used.

       quant_intra_matrix=<filename>
              Load a custom intra matrix file.  You can build such a file with
              xvid4conf's matrix editor.

       quant_inter_matrix=<filename>
              Load a custom inter matrix file.  You can build such a file with
              xvid4conf's matrix editor.

       keyframe_boost=<0-1000> (two pass mode only)
              Shift some bits from the pool for other  frame  types  to  intra
              frames,  thus improving keyframe quality.  This amount is an ex‐
              tra percentage, so a value of 10 will give  your  keyframes  10%
              more bits than normal (default: 0).

       kfthreshold=<value> (two pass mode only)
              Works  together  with  kfreduction.  Determines the minimum dis‐
              tance below which you consider that two  frames  are  considered
              consecutive  and  treated  differently  according to kfreduction
              (default: 10).

       kfreduction=<0-100> (two pass mode only)
              The above two settings  can  be  used  to  adjust  the  size  of
              keyframes  that  you consider too close to the first (in a row).
              kfthreshold sets the range in which keyframes are  reduced,  and
              kfreduction determines the bitrate reduction they get.  The last
              I-frame will get treated normally (default: 30).

       max_bframes=<0-4>
              Maximum number of B-frames to put between  I/P-frames  (default:
              2).

       bquant_ratio=<0-1000>
              quantizer  ratio between B- and non-B-frames, 150=1.50 (default:
              150)

       bquant_offset=<-1000-1000>
              quantizer offset between B- and non-B-frames, 100=1.00 (default:
              100)

       bf_threshold=<-255-255>
              This setting allows you to specify what priority to place on the
              use of B-frames.  The higher the value, the higher the probabil‐
              ity  of B-frames being used (default: 0).  Do not forget that B-
              frames usually have a higher quantizer, and therefore aggressive
              production of B-frames may cause worse visual quality.

       (no)closed_gop
              This  option  tells  Xvid  to close every GOP (Group Of Pictures
              bounded by two I-frames), which makes GOPs independent from each
              other.   This just implies that the last frame of the GOP is ei‐
              ther a P-frame or a N-frame but not a B-frame.  It is usually  a
              good idea to turn this option on (default: on).

       (no)packed
              This  option  is meant to solve frame-order issues when encoding
              to container formats like AVI that cannot cope with out-of-order
              frames.  In practice, most decoders (both software and hardware)
              are able to deal with frame-order themselves, and may  get  con‐
              fused  when this option is turned on, so you can safely leave if
              off, unless you really know what you are doing.
              WARNING: This will generate an illegal bitstream, and  will  not
              be decodable by ISO-MPEG-4 decoders except DivX/libavcodec/Xvid.
              WARNING: This will also store a fake DivX version in the file so
              the bug autodetection of some decoders might be confused.

       frame_drop_ratio=<0-100> (max_bframes=0 only)
              This setting allows the creation  of  variable  framerate  video
              streams.   The  value of the setting specifies a threshold under
              which, if the difference of the following frame to the  previous
              frame is below or equal to this threshold, a frame gets not cod‐
              ed (a so called n-vop is placed in the  stream).   On  playback,
              when reaching an n-vop the previous frame will be displayed.
              WARNING:  Playing with this setting may result in a jerky video,
              so use it at your own risks!

       rc_reaction_delay_factor=<value>
              This parameter controls the number of frames the CBR  rate  con‐
              troller will wait before reacting to bitrate changes and compen‐
              sating for them to obtain a constant bitrate over  an  averaging
              range of frames.

       rc_averaging_period=<value>
              Real  CBR  is hard to achieve.  Depending on the video material,
              bitrate can be variable, and hard to  predict.   Therefore  Xvid
              uses  an averaging period for which it guarantees a given amount
              of bits (minus a small variation).  This settings expresses  the
              "number  of frames" for which Xvid averages bitrate and tries to
              achieve CBR.

       rc_buffer=<value>
              size of the rate control buffer

       curve_compression_high=<0-100>
              This setting allows Xvid to take a certain  percentage  of  bits
              away  from  high  bitrate  scenes  and give them back to the bit
              reservoir.  You could also use this if you have a clip  with  so
              many  bits allocated to high-bitrate scenes that the low(er)-bi‐
              trate scenes start to look bad (default: 0).

       curve_compression_low=<0-100>
              This setting allows Xvid to give a certain percentage  of  extra
              bits  to  the low bitrate scenes, taking a few bits from the en‐
              tire clip.  This might come in handy if you have a  few  low-bi‐
              trate scenes that are still blocky (default: 0).

       overflow_control_strength=<0-100>
              During  pass one of two pass encoding, a scaled bitrate curve is
              computed.  The difference between that expected  curve  and  the
              result  obtained during encoding is called overflow.  Obviously,
              the two pass rate controller tries to compensate for that  over‐
              flow,  distributing  it over the next frames.  This setting con‐
              trols how much of the overflow is distributed every  time  there
              is  a  new  frame.   Low values allow lazy overflow control, big
              rate bursts are compensated for more slowly (could lead to  lack
              of  precision for small clips).  Higher values will make changes
              in bit redistribution more abrupt, possibly too  abrupt  if  you
              set it too high, creating artifacts (default: 5).
              NOTE:  This setting impacts quality a lot, play with it careful‐
              ly!

       max_overflow_improvement=<0-100>
              During the frame bit allocation, overflow control  may  increase
              the frame size.  This parameter specifies the maximum percentage
              by which the overflow control is allowed to increase  the  frame
              size, compared to the ideal curve allocation (default: 5).

       max_overflow_degradation=<0-100>
              During  the  frame bit allocation, overflow control may decrease
              the frame size.  This parameter specifies the maximum percentage
              by  which  the overflow control is allowed to decrease the frame
              size, compared to the ideal curve allocation (default: 5).

       container_frame_overhead=<0...>
              Specifies a frame average overhead per frame, in bytes.  Most of
              the time users express their target bitrate for video w/o taking
              care of the video container overhead.  This small  but  (mostly)
              constant overhead can cause the target file size to be exceeded.
              Xvid allows users to set the amount of overhead  per  frame  the
              container  generates  (give only an average per frame).  0 has a
              special meaning, it lets Xvid use its own  default  values  (de‐
              fault: 24 - AVI average overhead).

       profile=<profile_name>
              Restricts options and VBV (peak bitrate over a short period) ac‐
              cording to the Simple, Advanced Simple and DivX  profiles.   The
              resulting videos should be playable on standalone players adher‐
              ing to these profile specifications.
                 unrestricted
                      no restrictions (default)
                 sp0
                      simple profile at level 0
                 sp1
                      simple profile at level 1
                 sp2
                      simple profile at level 2
                 sp3
                      simple profile at level 3
                 sp4a
                      simple profile at level 4a
                 sp5
                      simple profile at level 5
                 sp6
                      simple profile at level 6
                 asp0
                      advanced simple profile at level 0
                 asp1
                      advanced simple profile at level 1
                 asp2
                      advanced simple profile at level 2
                 asp3
                      advanced simple profile at level 3
                 asp4
                      advanced simple profile at level 4
                 asp5
                      advanced simple profile at level 5
                 dxnhandheld
                      DXN handheld profile
                 dxnportntsc
                      DXN portable NTSC profile
                 dxnportpal
                      DXN portable PAL profile
                 dxnhtntsc
                      DXN home theater NTSC profile
                 dxnhtpal
                      DXN home theater PAL profile
                 dxnhdtv
                      DXN HDTV profile
              NOTE: These profiles should be used in conjunction with  an  ap‐
              propriate -ffourcc.  Generally DX50 is applicable, as some play‐
              ers do not recognize Xvid but most recognize DivX.

       par=<mode>
              Specifies the Pixel Aspect Ratio mode (not to be  confused  with
              DAR,  the  Display Aspect Ratio).  PAR is the ratio of the width
              and height of a single pixel.  So both are  related  like  this:
              DAR = PAR * (width/height).
              MPEG-4  defines 5 pixel aspect ratios and one extended one, giv‐
              ing the opportunity to specify a specific pixel aspect ratio.  5
              standard modes can be specified:
                 vga11
                      It is the usual PAR for PC content.  Pixels are a square
                      unit.
                 pal43
                      PAL standard 4:3 PAR.  Pixels are rectangles.
                 pal169
                      same as above
                 ntsc43
                      same as above
                 ntsc169
                      same as above (Do not forget to give the exact ratio.)
                 ext
                      Allows you to specify your own pixel aspect  ratio  with
                      par_width and par_height.
              NOTE:  In  general,  setting  aspect  and  autoaspect options is
              enough.

       par_width=<1-255> (par=ext only)
              Specifies the width of the custom pixel aspect ratio.

       par_height=<1-255> (par=ext only)
              Specifies the height of the custom pixel aspect ratio.

       aspect=<x/y | f (float value)>
              Store movie aspect internally, just like MPEG files.  Much nicer
              solution  than  rescaling,  because  quality  is  not decreased.
              MPlayer and a few others players will play these files  correct‐
              ly,  others will display them with the wrong aspect.  The aspect
              parameter can be given as a ratio or a floating point number.

       (no)autoaspect
              Same as the aspect option, but  automatically  computes  aspect,
              taking into account all the adjustments (crop/expand/scale/etc.)
              made in the filter chain.

       psnr
              Print the PSNR (peak signal to noise ratio) for the whole  video
              after  encoding  and  store  the per frame PSNR in a file with a
              name like 'psnr_hhmmss.log' in the current directory.   Returned
              values are in dB (decibel), the higher the better.

       debug
              Save  per-frame  statistics  in ./xvid.dbg. (This is not the two
              pass control file.)

       The following options are only available in Xvid 1.1.x and later.

       bvhq=<0|1>
              This setting allows vector candidates for B-frames  to  be  used
              for the encoding chosen using a rate distortion optimized opera‐
              tor, which is what is done for P-frames by the vhq option.  This
              produces  nicer-looking  B-frames while incurring almost no per‐
              formance penalty (default: 1).

       vbv_bufsize=<0...> (two pass mode only)
              Specify the video buffering verifier (VBV) buffer size  in  bits
              (default:  0 - VBV check disabled).  VBV allows restricting peak
              bitrate to make the video play  properly  on  hardware  players.
              For  example, the Home profile uses vbv_bufsize=3145728.  If you
              set vbv_bufsize you should  set  also  vbv_maxrate.   Note  that
              there  is  no vbv_peakrate because Xvid does not actually use it
              for bitrate controlling; the other VBV options are enough to re‐
              strict the peak bitrate.

       vbv_initial=<0...vbv_bufsize> (two pass mode only)
              Specify the initial fill of the VBV buffer in bits (default: 75%
              of vbv_bufsize).  The default is probably what you want.

       vbv_maxrate=<0...> (two pass mode only)
              Specify the maximum processing rate in bits/s (default: 0).  For
              example, the Home profile uses vbv_maxrate=4854000.

       The following option is only available in Xvid 1.2.x and later.

       threads=<0-n>
              Create n threads to run the motion estimation (default: 0).  The
              maximum number of threads that can be used is the picture height
              divided by 16.

   x264enc (-x264encopts)
       bitrate=<value>
              Sets  the  average  bitrate to be used in kbits/second (default:
              off).  Since local bitrate may vary, this average may be inaccu‐
              rate  for very short videos (see ratetol).  Constant bitrate can
              be achieved by combining this with vbv_maxrate,  at  significant
              reduction in quality.

       qp=<0-51>
              This selects the quantizer to use for P-frames.  I- and B-frames
              are offset from this value by ip_factor and  pb_factor,  respec‐
              tively.  20-40 is a useful range.  Lower values result in better
              fidelity, but higher bitrates.  0 is lossless.  Note that  quan‐
              tization  in  H.264  works  differently from MPEG-1/2/4: H.264's
              quantization parameter (QP) is on a logarithmic scale.  The map‐
              ping  is  approximately H264QP = 12 + 6*log2(MPEGQP).  For exam‐
              ple, MPEG at QP=2 is equivalent to H.264 at  QP=18.   Generally,
              this  option should be avoided and crf should be used instead as
              crf will yield better visual results for the same size.

       crf=<1.0-50.0>
              Enables constant quality mode, and  selects  the  quality.   The
              scale  is similar to QP.  Like the bitrate-based modes, this al‐
              lows each frame to use a different QP based on the frame's  com‐
              plexity.  This option should generally be used instead of qp.

       crf_max=<float>
              With  CRF  and VBV, limit RF to this value (may cause VBV under‐
              flows!).

       pass=<1-3>
              Enable 2 or 3-pass mode.  It is recommended to always encode  in
              2  or  3-pass  mode as it leads to a better bit distribution and
              improves overall quality.
                 1    first pass
                 2    second pass (of two pass encoding)
                 3    Nth pass (second and third passes of three  pass  encod‐
                      ing)
              Here is how it works, and how to use it:
              The  first  pass  (pass=1)  collects statistics on the video and
              writes them to a file.  You might want to deactivate  some  CPU-
              hungry options, apart from the ones that are on by default.
              In  two pass mode, the second pass (pass=2) reads the statistics
              file and bases ratecontrol decisions on it.
              In three pass mode, the second pass (pass=3, that is not a typo)
              does  both: It first reads the statistics, then overwrites them.
              You can use all encoding options,  except  very  CPU-hungry  op‐
              tions.
              The  third  pass (pass=3) is the same as the second pass, except
              that it has the second pass' statistics to work from.   You  can
              use all encoding options, including CPU-hungry ones.
              The  first pass may use either average bitrate or constant quan‐
              tizer.  ABR is recommended, since it does not require guessing a
              quantizer.  Subsequent passes are ABR, and must specify bitrate.

       profile=<name>
              Constrain options to be compatible with an H.264 profile.
                 baseline
                      no8x8dct  bframes=0  nocabac cqm=flat weightp=0 nointer‐
                      laced qp>0
                 main no8x8dct cqm=flat qp>0
                 high qp>0 (default)

       preset=<name>
              Use a preset to select encoding settings.
                 ultrafast
                      no8x8dct aq_mode=0 b_adapt=0 bframes=0  nodeblock  nomb‐
                      tree  me=dia  nomixed_refs  partitions=none ref=1 scene‐
                      cut=0 subq=0 trellis=0 noweight_b weightp=0
                 superfast
                      nombtree me=dia nomixed_refs partitions=i8x8,i4x4  ref=1
                      subq=1 trellis=0 weightp=0
                 veryfast
                      nombtree nomixed_refs ref=1 subq=2 trellis=0 weightp=0
                 faster
                      nomixed_refs rc_lookahead=20 ref=5 subq=4 weightp=1
                 fast rc_lookahead=30 ref=2 subq=6
                 medium
                      Default settings apply.
                 slow b_adapt=2   direct=auto   me=umh  rc_lookahead=50  ref=5
                      subq=8
                 slower
                      b_adapt=2  direct=auto  me=umh  partitions=all  rc_look‐
                      ahead=60 ref=8 subq=9 trellis=2
                 veryslow
                      b_adapt=2 b_frames=8 direct=auto me=umh me_range=24 par‐
                      titions=all ref=16 subq=10 trellis=2 rc_lookahead=60
                 placebo
                      bframes=16 b_adapt=2  direct=auto  nofast_pskip  me=tesa
                      me_range=24    partitions=all   rc_lookahead=60   ref=16
                      subq=10 trellis=2

       tune=<name,[name,...]>
              Tune the settings for a particular type of source or  situation.
              All  tuned  settings  are  overridden by explicit user-settings.
              Multiple tunings are separated by commas, but only one psy  tun‐
              ing can be used at a time.
                 film (psy tuning)
                      deblock=-1,-1 psy-rd=<unset>,0.15
                 animation (psy tuning)
                      b_frames={+2}       deblock=1,1       psy-rd=0.4:<unset>
                      aq_strength=0.6 ref={double if >1 else 1}
                 grain (psy tuning)
                      aq_strength=0.5  nodct_decimate  deadzone_inter=6  dead‐
                      zone_intra=6  deblock=-2,-2 ipratio=1.1 pbratio=1.1 psy-
                      rd=<unset>,0.25 qcomp=0.8
                 stillimage (psy tuning)
                      aq_strength=1.2 deblock=-3,-3 psy-rd=2.0,0.7
                 psnr (psy tuning)
                      aq_mode=0 nopsy
                 ssim (psy tuning)
                      aq_mode=2 nopsy
                 fastdecode
                      nocabac nodeblock noweight_b weightp=0
                 zerolatency
                      bframes=0  force_cfr   rc_lookahead=0   sync_lookahead=0
                      sliced_threads

       slow_firstpass
              Disables  the  following  faster  options with pass=1: no_8x8dct
              me=dia partitions=none ref=1 subq={2 if >2 else unchanged} trel‐
              lis=0 fast_pskip.  These settings significantly improve encoding
              speed while having little or no impact on the quality of the fi‐
              nal pass.
              This option is implied with preset=placebo.

       keyint=<value>
              Sets maximum interval between IDR-frames (default: 250).  Larger
              values save bits, thus improve quality, at the cost  of  seeking
              precision.   Unlike  MPEG-1/2/4,  H.264 does not suffer from DCT
              drift with large values of keyint.

       keyint_min=<1-keyint/2>
              Sets minimum interval between IDR-frames  (default:  auto).   If
              scenecuts appear within this interval, they are still encoded as
              I-frames, but do not start a new GOP.  In H.264, I-frames do not
              necessarily  bound a closed GOP because it is allowable for a P-
              frame to be predicted from more frames than just the  one  frame
              before it (also see frameref).  Therefore, I-frames are not nec‐
              essarily seekable.  IDR-frames restrict subsequent P-frames from
              referring to any frame prior to the IDR-frame.

       scenecut=<-1-100>
              Controls  how  aggressively  to  insert extra I-frames (default:
              40).  With small values of scenecut,  the  codec  often  has  to
              force  an  I-frame  when it would exceed keyint.  Good values of
              scenecut may find a better location for the I-frame.  Large val‐
              ues  use  more  I-frames  than necessary, thus wasting bits.  -1
              disables scene-cut detection, so I-frames are inserted only once
              every  other  keyint frames, even if a scene-cut occurs earlier.
              This is not recommended and wastes bitrate as scenecuts  encoded
              as  P-frames  are  just as big as I-frames, but do not reset the
              "keyint counter".

       (no)intra_refresh
              Periodic intra block refresh instead of keyframes (default: dis‐
              abled).   This  option disables IDR-frames, and, instead, uses a
              moving vertical bar of intra-coded blocks. This reduces compres‐
              sion  efficiency  but  benefits  low-latency  streaming  and re‐
              silience to packet loss.

       frameref=<1-16>
              Number of previous frames used as predictors in B- and  P-frames
              (default:  3).   This  is effective in anime, but in live-action
              material the improvements usually drop off very rapidly above  6
              or  so  reference frames.  This has no effect on decoding speed,
              but does increase the memory needed for decoding.  Some decoders
              can only handle a maximum of 15 reference frames.

       bframes=<0-16>
              maximum  number  of consecutive B-frames between I- and P-frames
              (default: 3)

       (no)b_adapt
              Automatically decides when to use B-frames and how many,  up  to
              the  maximum  specified  above (default: on).  If this option is
              disabled, then the maximum number of B-frames is used.

       b_bias=<-100-100>
              Controls the decision performed by  b_adapt.   A  higher  b_bias
              produces more B-frames (default: 0).

       b_pyramid=<normal|strict|none>
              Allows  B-frames  to  be used as references for predicting other
              frames.  For example, consider 3 consecutive B-frames: I0 B1  B2
              B3 P4.  Without this option, B-frames follow the same pattern as
              MPEG-[124].  So they are coded in the order I0 P4 B1 B2 B3,  and
              all  the  B-frames  are predicted from I0 and P4.  With this op‐
              tion, they are coded as I0 P4 B2 B1  B3.   B2  is  the  same  as
              above,  but  B1 is predicted from I0 and B2, and B3 is predicted
              from B2 and P4.  This usually results in slightly improved  com‐
              pression,  at almost no speed cost.  However, this is an experi‐
              mental option: it is not fully tuned and may  not  always  help.
              Requires  bframes  >= 2.  Disadvantage: increases decoding delay
              to 2 frames.
                 normal
                      Allow B-frames as references  as  described  above  (not
                      Blu-ray compatible).
                 strict
                      Disallow P-frames referencing B-frames. Gives worse com‐
                      pression, but is required for Blu-ray compatibility.
                 none
                      Disable using B-frames as references.

       (no)open_gop
              Use recovery points to close GOPs; only available with bframes.

       (no)bluray_compat
              Enable compatibility hacks for Blu-Ray support.

       (no)fake_interlaced
              Flag stream as interlaced but encode progressive. Makes it poss‐
              sible  to  encode 25p and 30p Blu-Ray streams. Ignored in inter‐
              laced mode.

       frame_packing=<0-5>
              Define frame arrangement for stereoscopic videos.
                 0    Checkerboard - pixels are alternately from L and R.
                 1    Column alternation - L and R are interlaced by column.
                 2    Row alternation - L and R are interlaced by row.
                 3    Side by side - L is on the left, R is on the right.
                 4    Top-bottom - L is on top, R is on the bottom.
                 5    Frame alternation - one view per frame.

       (no)deblock
              Use deblocking filter (default: on).  As it  takes  very  little
              time compared to its quality gain, it is not recommended to dis‐
              able it.

       deblock=<-6-6>,<-6-6>
              The first parameter  is  AlphaC0  (default:  0).   This  adjusts
              thresholds for the H.264 in-loop deblocking filter.  First, this
              parameter adjusts the maximum amount of change that  the  filter
              is  allowed to cause on any one pixel.  Secondly, this parameter
              affects the threshold for difference across the edge being  fil‐
              tered.   A  positive  value reduces blocking artifacts more, but
              will also smear details.
              The second parameter is Beta (default: 0).  This affects the de‐
              tail  threshold.   Very  detailed blocks are not filtered, since
              the smoothing caused by the filter would be more noticeable than
              the original blocking.
              The  default behavior of the filter almost always achieves opti‐
              mal quality, so it is best to either leave it alone, or make on‐
              ly  small adjustments.  However, if your source material already
              has some blocking or noise which you would like  to  remove,  it
              may be a good idea to turn it up a little bit.

       (no)cabac
              Use  CABAC (Context-Adaptive Binary Arithmetic Coding) (default:
              on).  Slightly slows down encoding and decoding, but should save
              10-15%  bitrate.  Unless you are looking for decoding speed, you
              should not disable it.

       qp_min=<1-51> (ABR or two pass)
              Minimum quantizer, 10-30 seems to be a  useful  range  (default:
              10).

       qp_max=<1-51> (ABR or two pass)
              maximum quantizer (default: 51)

       qp_step=<1-50> (ABR or two pass)
              maximum  value  by which the quantizer may be incremented/decre‐
              mented between frames (default: 4)

       (no)mbtree
              Enable macroblock tree ratecontrol (default:  enabled).   Use  a
              large lookahead to track temporal propagation of data and weight
              quality accordingly.  In multi-pass mode, this writes to a sepa‐
              rate stats file named <passlogfile>.mbtree.

       rc_lookahead=<0-250>
              Adjust the mbtree lookahead distance (default: 40).  Larger val‐
              ues will be slower and cause x264 to consume  more  memory,  but
              can yield higher quality.

       ratetol=<0.1-100.0> (ABR or two pass)
              allowed  variance  in average bitrate (no particular units) (de‐
              fault: 1.0)

       vbv_maxrate=<value> (ABR or two pass)
              maximum local bitrate, in kbits/second (default: disabled)

       vbv_bufsize=<value> (ABR or two pass)
              averaging period for vbv_maxrate, in kbits (default: none,  must
              be specified if vbv_maxrate is enabled)

       vbv_init=<0.0-1.0> (ABR or two pass)
              initial buffer occupancy, as a fraction of vbv_bufsize (default:
              0.9)

       ip_factor=<value>
              quantizer factor between I- and P-frames (default: 1.4)

       pb_factor=<value>
              quantizer factor between P- and B-frames (default: 1.3)

       qcomp=<0-1> (ABR or two pass)
              quantizer compression (default: 0.6).  A lower value  makes  the
              bitrate  more constant, while a higher value makes the quantiza‐
              tion parameter more constant.

       cplx_blur=<0-999> (two pass only)
              Temporal blur of the estimated frame  complexity,  before  curve
              compression  (default:  20).   Lower  values allow the quantizer
              value to jump around more, higher values force it to  vary  more
              smoothly.   cplx_blur ensures that each I-frame has quality com‐
              parable to the following P-frames, and ensures that  alternating
              high  and  low complexity frames (e.g. low fps animation) do not
              waste bits on fluctuating quantizer.

       qblur=<0-99> (two pass only)
              Temporal blur of the quantization parameter,  after  curve  com‐
              pression (default: 0.5).  Lower values allow the quantizer value
              to jump around more, higher values force it to vary more smooth‐
              ly.

       zones=<zone0>[/<zone1>[/...]]
              User  specified  quality  for  specific  parts (ending, credits,
              ...).  Each zone is <start-frame>,<end-frame>,<option> where op‐
              tion may be
                 q=<0-51>
                      quantizer
                 b=<0.01-100.0>
                      bitrate multiplier
              NOTE: The quantizer option is not strictly enforced.  It affects
              only the planning stage of ratecontrol, and is still subject  to
              overflow compensation and qp_min/qp_max.

       direct_pred=<name>
              Determines  the  type  of motion prediction used for direct mac‐
              roblocks in B-frames.
                 none Direct macroblocks are not used.
                 spatial
                      Motion vectors are extrapolated from neighboring blocks.
                      (default)
                 temporal
                      Motion  vectors  are  extrapolated from the following P-
                      frame.
                 auto The codec selects between spatial and temporal for  each
                      frame.
              Spatial  and temporal are approximately the same speed and PSNR,
              the choice between them depends on the video content.   Auto  is
              slightly  better,  but slower.  Auto is most effective when com‐
              bined with multipass.  direct_pred=none is both slower and lower
              quality.

       weightp
              Weighted P-frame prediction mode (default: 2).
                 0    disabled (fastest)
                 1    weighted refs (better quality)
                 2    weighted refs + duplicates (best)

       (no)weight_b
              Use weighted prediction in B-frames.  Without this option, bidi‐
              rectionally predicted macroblocks give equal weight to each ref‐
              erence  frame.   With this option, the weights are determined by
              the temporal position of the B-frame relative to the references.
              Requires bframes > 1.

       partitions=<list>
              Enable     some     optional    macroblock    types    (default:
              p8x8,b8x8,i8x8,i4x4).
                 p8x8 Enable types p16x8, p8x16, p8x8.
                 p4x4 Enable types p8x4, p4x8, p4x4.  p4x4 is recommended only
                      with subq >= 5, and only at low resolutions.
                 b8x8 Enable types b16x8, b8x16, b8x8.
                 i8x8 Enable  type  i8x8.  i8x8 has no effect unless 8x8dct is
                      enabled.
                 i4x4 Enable type i4x4.
                 all  Enable all of the above types.
                 none Disable all of the above types.
              Regardless of this option, macroblock types p16x16, b16x16,  and
              i16x16 are always enabled.
              The  idea is to find the type and size that best describe a cer‐
              tain area of the picture.  For example, a global pan  is  better
              represented by 16x16 blocks, while small moving objects are bet‐
              ter represented by smaller blocks.

       (no)8x8dct
              Adaptive spatial transform size: allows  macroblocks  to  choose
              between  4x4 and 8x8 DCT.  Also allows the i8x8 macroblock type.
              Without this option, only 4x4 DCT is used.

       me=<name>
              Select fullpixel motion estimation algorithm.
                 dia  diamond search, radius 1 (fast)
                 hex  hexagon search, radius 2 (default)
                 umh  uneven multi-hexagon search (slow)
                 esa  exhaustive search (very slow, and no better than umh)

       me_range=<4-64>
              radius of exhaustive or multi-hexagon  motion  search  (default:
              16)

       subq=<0-11>
              Adjust subpel refinement quality.  This parameter controls qual‐
              ity versus speed tradeoffs involved in the motion estimation de‐
              cision  process.   subq=5  can  compress  up  to 10% better than
              subq=1.
                 0    Runs fullpixel precision motion estimation on all candi‐
                      date  macroblock types.  Then selects the best type with
                      SAD metric (faster than subq=1, not  recommended  unless
                      you're looking for ultra-fast encoding).
                 1    Does  as 0, then refines the motion of that type to fast
                      quarterpixel precision (fast).
                 2    Runs halfpixel precision motion estimation on all candi‐
                      date  macroblock types.  Then selects the best type with
                      SATD metric.  Then refines the motion of  that  type  to
                      fast quarterpixel precision.
                 3    As 2, but uses a slower quarterpixel refinement.
                 4    Runs  fast  quarterpixel  precision motion estimation on
                      all candidate macroblock types.  Then selects  the  best
                      type  with  SATD metric.  Then finishes the quarterpixel
                      refinement for that type.
                 5    Runs best quality quarterpixel precision motion  estima‐
                      tion on all candidate macroblock types, before selecting
                      the best type.  Also refines the two motion vectors used
                      in  bidirectional  macroblocks  with SATD metric, rather
                      than reusing  vectors  from  the  forward  and  backward
                      searches.
                 6    Enables rate-distortion optimization of macroblock types
                      in I- and P-frames.
                 7    Enables rate-distortion optimization of macroblock types
                      in all frames (default).
                 8    Enables  rate-distortion  optimization of motion vectors
                      and intra prediction modes in I- and P-frames.
                 9    Enables rate-distortion optimization of  motion  vectors
                      and intra prediction modes in all frames.
                 10   QP-RD;   requires  trellis=2  and  aq_mode=1  or  higher
                      (best).
                 11   Full RD; disable all early terminations.
              In the above, "all candidates" does not exactly mean all enabled
              types: 4x4, 4x8, 8x4 are tried only if 8x8 is better than 16x16.

       (no)chroma_me
              Takes  into  account  chroma  information during subpixel motion
              search (default: enabled).  Requires subq>=5.

       (no)mixed_refs
              Allows each 8x8 or 16x8 motion partition to independently select
              a reference frame.  Without this option, a whole macroblock must
              use the same reference.  Requires frameref>1.

       trellis=<0-2> (cabac only)
              rate-distortion optimal quantization
                 0    disabled
                 1    enabled only for the final encode (default)
                 2    enabled  during  all  mode  decisions  (slow,   requires
                      subq>=6)

       psy-rd=rd[,trell]
              Sets the strength of the psychovisual optimization.
                 rd=<0.0-10.0>
                      psy  optimization  strength (requires subq>=6) (default:
                      1.0)
                 trell=<0.0-10.0>
                      trellis (requires trellis, experimental) (default: 0.0)

       (no)psy
              Enable psychovisual optimizations that hurt PSNR  and  SSIM  but
              ought to look better (default: enabled).

       deadzone_inter=<0-32>
              Set  the  size  of the inter luma quantization deadzone for non-
              trellis quantization (default: 21).  Lower values help  to  pre‐
              serve fine details and film grain (typically useful for high bi‐
              trate/quality encode), while higher values help filter out these
              details  to  save  bits  that  can  be spent again on other mac‐
              roblocks and frames (typically useful  for  bitrate-starved  en‐
              codes).   It  is  recommended  that  you start by tweaking dead‐
              zone_intra before changing this parameter.

       deadzone_intra=<0-32>
              Set the size of the intra luma quantization  deadzone  for  non-
              trellis  quantization  (default:  11).  This option has the same
              effect as deadzone_inter except that it  affects  intra  frames.
              It  is recommended that you start by tweaking this parameter be‐
              fore changing deadzone_inter.

       (no)fast_pskip
              Performs early skip detection in  P-frames  (default:  enabled).
              This  usually  improves  speed  at no cost, but it can sometimes
              produce artifacts in areas with no details, like sky.

       (no)dct_decimate
              Eliminate dct blocks in P-frames containing only a small  single
              coefficient  (default: enabled).  This will remove some details,
              so it will save bits that can be spent again  on  other  frames,
              hopefully  raising  overall subjective quality.  If you are com‐
              pressing non-anime content with a high target bitrate,  you  may
              want to disable this to preserve as much detail as possible.

       nr=<0-100000>
              Noise  reduction,  0 means disabled.  100-1000 is a useful range
              for typical content, but you may want to turn it up a  bit  more
              for  very noisy content (default: 0).  Given its small impact on
              speed, you might want to prefer to use this over filtering noise
              away with video filters like denoise3d or hqdn3d.

       chroma_qp_offset=<-12-12>
              Use  a different quantizer for chroma as compared to luma.  Use‐
              ful values are in the range <-2-2> (default: 0).

       aq_mode=<0-2>
              Defines how adaptive quantization (AQ) distributes bits:
                 0    disabled
                 1    Avoid moving bits between frames.
                 2    Move bits between frames (by default).

       aq_strength=<positive float value>
              Controls how much adaptive quantization  (AQ)  reduces  blocking
              and blurring in flat and textured areas (default: 1.0).  A value
              of 0.5 will lead to weak AQ and less details, when  a  value  of
              1.5 will lead to strong AQ and more details.

       cqm=<flat|jvt|<filename>>
              Either  uses  a predefined custom quantization matrix or loads a
              JM format matrix file.
                 flat
                      Use the predefined flat 16 matrix (default).
                 jvt
                      Use the predefined JVT matrix.
                 <filename>
                      Use the provided JM format matrix file.
              NOTE: Windows CMD.EXE users may experience problems with parsing
              the command line if they attempt to use all the CQM lists.  This
              is due to a command line length limitation.  In this case it  is
              recommended the lists be put into a JM format CQM file and load‐
              ed as specified above.

       cqm4iy=<list> (also see cqm)
              Custom 4x4 intra luminance matrix, given as a list of  16  comma
              separated values in the 1-255 range.

       cqm4ic=<list> (also see cqm)
              Custom 4x4 intra chrominance matrix, given as a list of 16 comma
              separated values in the 1-255 range.

       cqm4py=<list> (also see cqm)
              Custom 4x4 inter luminance matrix, given as a list of  16  comma
              separated values in the 1-255 range.

       cqm4pc=<list> (also see cqm)
              Custom 4x4 inter chrominance matrix, given as a list of 16 comma
              separated values in the 1-255 range.

       cqm8iy=<list> (also see cqm)
              Custom 8x8 intra luminance matrix, given as a list of  64  comma
              separated values in the 1-255 range.

       cqm8py=<list> (also see cqm)
              Custom  8x8  inter luminance matrix, given as a list of 64 comma
              separated values in the 1-255 range.

       level_idc=<10-51>
              Set the bitstream's level as defined by annex  A  of  the  H.264
              standard  (default:  51  - level 5.1).  This is used for telling
              the decoder what capabilities it needs to support.  Use this pa‐
              rameter  only  if you know what it means, and you have a need to
              set it.

       (no)cpu_independent
              Ensure exact reproducibility across different  CPUs  instead  of
              chosing  different algorithms when available/better (default:en‐
              abled).

       threads=<0-16>
              Spawn threads to encode in parallel on multiple  CPUs  (default:
              0).   This  has  a  slight penalty to compression quality.  0 or
              'auto' tells x264 to detect how many CPUs you have and  pick  an
              appropriate number of threads.

       (no)sliced_threads
              Use  slice-based  threading  (default: disabled).  Unlike normal
              threading, this option adds no encoding latency, but is slightly
              slower and less effective at compression.

       slice_max_size=<0 or positive integer>
              Maximum  slice size in bytes (default: 0).  A value of zero dis‐
              ables the maximum.

       slice_max_mbs=<0 or positive integer>
              Maximum slice size in number of  macroblocks  (default:  0).   A
              value of zero disables the maximum.

       slices=<0 or positive integer>
              Maximum number of slices per frame (default: 0).  A value of ze‐
              ro disables the maximum.

       sync_lookahead=<0-250>
              Adjusts the size of the threaded lookahead buffer (default:  0).
              0 or 'auto' tells x264 to automatically determine buffer size.

       (no)deterministic
              Use only deterministic optimizations with multithreaded encoding
              (default: enabled).

       (no)global_header
              Causes SPS and PPS to appear only once, at the beginning of  the
              bitstream  (default:  disabled).  Some players, such as the Sony
              PSP, require the use of this option.  The default behavior caus‐
              es SPS and PPS to repeat prior to each IDR frame.

       (no)tff
              Enable interlaced mode, top field first (default: disabled)

       (no)bff
              Enable interlaced mode, bottom field first (default: disabled)

       nal_hrd=<none|vbr|cbr>
              Signal HRD information (requires vbv_bufsize) (default: none).

       (no)pic_struct
              Force pic_struct in Picture Timing SEI (default: disabled).

       (no)constrained_intra
              Enable  constrained  intra prediction (default: disabled).  This
              significantly reduces compression, but is required for the  base
              layer of SVC encodes.

       output_csp=<i420|i422|i444|rgb>
              Specify output colorspace (default: i420).

       (no)aud
              Write  access unit delimeters to the stream (default: disabled).
              Enable this only if your target container format requires access
              unit delimiters.

       overscan=<undef|show|crop>
              Include  VUI  overscan  information in the stream (default: dis‐
              abled).  See doc/vui.txt in the x264 source code for more infor‐
              mation.

       videoformat=<component|pal|ntsc|secam|mac|undef>
              Include  VUI  video  format  information in the stream (default:
              disabled).  This is a purely informative setting for  describing
              the  original  source.   See doc/vui.txt in the x264 source code
              for more information.

       (no)fullrange
              Include VUI full range information in the stream (default:  dis‐
              abled).   Use this option if your source video is not range lim‐
              ited.  See doc/vui.txt in the x264 source code for more informa‐
              tion.

       colorprim=<bt709|bt470m|bt470bg|smpte170m|smpte240m|film|undef>
              Include  color  primaries information (default: disabled).  This
              can be used for color correction.  See doc/vui.txt in  the  x264
              source code for more information.

       transfer=<bt709|bt470m|bt470bg|lin‐
       ear|log100|log316|smpte170m|smpte240m>
              Include VUI transfer characteristics information in  the  stream
              (default:  disabled).   This  can  be used for color correction.
              See doc/vui.txt in the x264 source code for more information.

       colormatrix=<bt709|fcc|bt470bg|smpte170m|smpte240m|GBR|YCgCo>
              Include VUI matrix coefficients in  the  stream  (default:  dis‐
              abled).  This can be used for color correction.  See doc/vui.txt
              in the x264 source code for more information.

       chromaloc=<0-5>
              Include VUI chroma sample location  information  in  the  stream
              (default: disabled).  Use this option to ensure alignment of the
              chroma and luma  planes  after  color  space  conversions.   See
              doc/vui.txt in the x264 source code for more information.

       log=<-1-3>
              Adjust the amount of logging info printed to the screen.
                 -1   none
                  0   Print errors only.
                  1   warnings
                  2   PSNR  and other analysis statistics when the encode fin‐
                      ishes (default)
                  3   PSNR, QP, frametype, size, and other statistics for  ev‐
                      ery frame

       (no)psnr
              Print signal-to-noise ratio statistics.
              NOTE:  The  'Y',  'U', 'V', and 'Avg' PSNR fields in the summary
              are not mathematically sound (they are  simply  the  average  of
              per-frame  PSNRs).   They are kept only for comparison to the JM
              reference codec.  For all other purposes, please use either  the
              'Global' PSNR, or the per-frame PSNRs printed by log=3.

       (no)ssim
              Print  the Structural Similarity Metric results.  This is an al‐
              ternative to PSNR, and may be better correlated  with  the  per‐
              ceived quality of the compressed video.

       (no)visualize
              Enable x264 visualizations during encoding.  If the x264 on your
              system supports it, a new window will be opened during  the  en‐
              coding  process,  in which x264 will attempt to present an over‐
              view of how each frame gets encoded.  Each block type on the vi‐
              sualized movie will be colored as follows:

       dump_yuv=<file name>
              Dump YUV frames to the specified file.  For debugging use.
                 red/pink
                      intra block
                 blue
                      inter block
                 green
                      skip block
                 yellow
                      B-block
              This  feature  can  be  considered  experimental  and subject to
              change.  In particular, it depends on x264 being  compiled  with
              visualizations  enabled.   Note  that  as  of writing this, x264
              pauses after encoding and visualizing each  frame,  waiting  for
              the  user  to press a key, at which point the next frame will be
              encoded.

   xvfw (-xvfwopts)
       Encoding with Video for Windows codecs is mostly  obsolete  unless  you
       wish to encode to some obscure fringe codec.

       codec=<name>
              The name of the binary codec file with which to encode.

       compdata=<file>
              The name of the codec settings file (like firstpass.mcf) created
              by vfw2menc.

   MPEG muxer (-mpegopts)
       The MPEG muxer can generate 5 types of streams, each of which has  rea‐
       sonable default parameters that the user can override.  Generally, when
       generating MPEG files, it is advisable to disable MEncoder's frame-skip
       code  (see  -noskip, -mc as well as the harddup and softskip video fil‐
       ters).

       EXAMPLE:
                 format=mpeg2:tsaf:vbitrate=8000

       format=<mpeg1 | mpeg2 | xvcd | xsvcd | dvd | pes1 | pes2>
              stream format (default: mpeg2).  pes1 and pes2 are  very  broken
              formats  (no  pack header and no padding), but VDR uses them; do
              not choose them unless you know exactly what you are doing.

       size=<up to 65535>
              Pack size in bytes, do not change unless you know  exactly  what
              you are doing (default: 2048).

       muxrate=<int>
              Nominal  muxrate  in  kbit/s  used in the pack headers (default:
              1800 kb/s).  Will be updated as necessary in the case  of  'for‐
              mat=mpeg1' or 'mpeg2'.

       tsaf
              Sets  timestamps  on  all  frames, if possible; recommended when
              format=dvd.  If dvdauthor complains with a message like "..audio
              sector  out  of  range...", you probably did not enable this op‐
              tion.

       interleaving2
              Uses a better algorithm to interleave audio and  video  packets,
              based  on  the  principle that the muxer will always try to fill
              the stream with the largest percentage of free space.

       vdelay=<1-32760>
              Initial video delay time, in milliseconds (default: 0),  use  it
              if  you  want  to delay video with respect to audio.  It doesn't
              work with :drop.

       adelay=<1-32760>
              Initial audio delay time, in milliseconds (default: 0),  use  it
              if you want to delay audio with respect to video.

       drop
              When used with vdelay the muxer drops the part of audio that was
              anticipated.

       vwidth, vheight=<1-4095>
              Set the video width and height when video is MPEG-1/2.

       vpswidth, vpsheight=<1-4095>
              Set pan and scan video width and height when video is MPEG-2.

       vaspect=<1 | 4/3 | 16/9 | 221/100>
              Sets the display aspect ratio for MPEG-2 video.  Do not  use  it
              on  MPEG-1  or  the  resulting  aspect  ratio will be completely
              wrong.

       vbitrate=<int>
              Sets the video bitrate in kbit/s for MPEG-1/2 video.

       vframerate=<24000/1001 | 24 | 25 | 30000/1001 | 30 | 50 | 60000/1001  |
       60 >
              Sets  the framerate for MPEG-1/2 video.  This option will be ig‐
              nored if used with the telecine option.

       telecine
              Enables 3:2 pulldown soft telecine mode: The muxer will make the
              video stream look like it was encoded at 30000/1001 fps.  It on‐
              ly  works  with  MPEG-2  video  when  the  output  framerate  is
              24000/1001  fps,  convert it with -ofps if necessary.  Any other
              framerate is incompatible with this option.

       film2pal
              Enables FILM to PAL and NTSC to PAL soft telecine mode: The mux‐
              er  will  make  the  video stream look like it was encoded at 25
              fps.  It only works with MPEG-2 video when the output  framerate
              is 24000/1001 fps, convert it with -ofps if necessary.  Any oth‐
              er framerate is incompatible with this option.

       tele_src and tele_dest
              Enables arbitrary telecining  using  Donand  Graft's  DGPulldown
              code.   You need to specify the original and the desired framer‐
              ate; the muxer will make the video stream look like it  was  en‐
              coded at the desired framerate.  It only works with MPEG-2 video
              when the input framerate is smaller than  the  output  framerate
              and the framerate increase is <= 1.5.

              EXAMPLE:
                 tele_src=25,tele_dest=30000/1001
                      PAL to NTSC telecining

       vbuf_size=<40-1194>
              Sets  the size of the video decoder's buffer, expressed in kilo‐
              bytes.  Specify it only if the bitrate of the  video  stream  is
              too  high  for  the chosen format and if you know perfectly well
              what you are doing.  A too high value may lead to an  unplayable
              movie, depending on the player's capabilities.  When muxing HDTV
              video a value of 400 should suffice.

       abuf_size=<4-64>
              Sets the size of the audio decoder's buffer, expressed in  kilo‐
              bytes.  The same principle as for vbuf_size applies.

   FFmpeg libavformat demuxers (-lavfdopts)
       analyzeduration=<value>
              Maximum length in seconds to analyze the stream properties.

       format=<value>
              Force a specific libavformat demuxer.

       o=<key>=<value>[,<key>=<value>[,...]]
              Pass  AVOptions  to  libavformat demuxer.  Note, a patch to make
              the o= unneeded and pass all unknown options through  the  AVOp‐
              tion  system  is welcome.  A full list of AVOptions can be found
              in the FFmpeg manual.  Note that some options may conflict  with
              MPlayer/MEncoder options.

              EXAMPLE:
                 o=ignidx

       probesize=<value>
              Maximum  amount of data to probe during the detection phase.  In
              the case of MPEG-TS this value identifies the maximum number  of
              TS packets to scan.

       cryptokey=<hexstring>
              Encryption  key  the demuxer should use.  This is the raw binary
              data of the key converted to a hexadecimal string.

   FFmpeg libavformat muxers (-lavfopts) (also see -of lavf)
       delay=<value>
              Currently only meaningful for  MPEG[12]:  Maximum  allowed  dis‐
              tance,  in  seconds,  between  the reference timer of the output
              stream (SCR) and the decoding timestamp  (DTS)  for  any  stream
              present (demux to decode delay).  Default is 0.7 (as mandated by
              the standards defined by MPEG).  Higher  values  require  larger
              buffers and must not be used.

       format=<container_format>
              Override which container format to mux into (default: autodetect
              from output file extension).
                 mpg
                      MPEG-1 systems and MPEG-2 PS
                 asf
                      Advanced Streaming Format
                 avi
                      Audio Video Interleave file
                 wav
                      Waveform Audio
                 swf
                      Macromedia Flash
                 flv
                      Macromedia Flash video files
                 rm
                      RealAudio and RealVideo
                 au
                      SUN AU format
                 nut
                      NUT open container format (experimental)
                 mov
                      QuickTime
                 mp4
                      MPEG-4 format
                 ipod
                      MPEG-4 format with extra header flags required by  Apple
                      iPod firmware
                 dv
                      Sony Digital Video container
                 matroska
                      Matroska

       muxrate=<rate>
              Nominal  bitrate of the multiplex, in bits per second; currently
              it is meaningful only for MPEG[12].   Sometimes  raising  it  is
              necessary in order to avoid "buffer underflows".

       o=<key>=<value>[,<key>=<value>[,...]]
              Pass  AVOptions to libavformat muxer.  Note, a patch to make the
              o= unneeded and pass all unknown options  through  the  AVOption
              system is welcome.  A full list of AVOptions can be found in the
              FFmpeg manual.  Note that some options may  conflict  with  MEn‐
              coder options.

              EXAMPLE:
                 o=packetsize=100

       packetsize=<size>
              Size,  expressed  in bytes, of the unitary packet for the chosen
              format.  When muxing to  MPEG[12]  implementations  the  default
              values are: 2324 for [S]VCD, 2048 for all others formats.

       preload=<distance>
              Currently  only  meaningful  for  MPEG[12]: Initial distance, in
              seconds, between the reference timer of the output stream  (SCR)
              and  the  decoding timestamp (DTS) for any stream present (demux
              to decode delay).

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
       There are a number of environment variables that can be used to control
       the behavior of MPlayer and MEncoder.

       MPLAYER_CHARSET (also see -msgcharset)
              Convert  console messages to the specified charset (default: au‐
              todetect).  A value of "noconv" means no conversion.

       MPLAYER_HOME
              Directory where MPlayer looks for user settings.

       MPLAYER_VERBOSE (also see -v and -msglevel)
              Set the initial verbosity level across all message modules  (de‐
              fault:  0).  The resulting verbosity corresponds to that of -ms‐
              glevel 5 plus the value of MPLAYER_VERBOSE.

   libaf:
       LADSPA_PATH
              If LADSPA_PATH is set, it searches for the specified  file.   If
              it  is  not  set,  you  must  supply a fully specified pathname.
              FIXME: This is also mentioned in the ladspa section.

   libdvdcss:
       DVDCSS_CACHE
              Specify a directory in which to store title  key  values.   This
              will  speed up descrambling of DVDs which are in the cache.  The
              DVDCSS_CACHE directory is created if it does not  exist,  and  a
              subdirectory  is created named after the DVD's title or manufac‐
              turing date.  If DVDCSS_CACHE is not set or is empty,  libdvdcss
              will  use  the  default  value which is "${HOME}/.dvdcss/" under
              Unix and "C:\Documents and Settings\$USER\Application Data\dvdc‐
              ss\" under Win32.  The special value "off" disables caching.

       DVDCSS_METHOD
              Sets  the  authentication  and  decryption method that libdvdcss
              will use to read scrambled discs.  Can be one of title,  key  or
              disc.
                 key
                      is the default method.  libdvdcss will use a set of cal‐
                      culated player keys to try and get the disc  key.   This
                      can  fail  if  the  drive  does not recognize any of the
                      player keys.
                 disc
                      is a fallback method when key has  failed.   Instead  of
                      using player keys, libdvdcss will crack the disc key us‐
                      ing a brute force algorithm.  This process is CPU inten‐
                      sive and requires 64 MB of memory to store temporary da‐
                      ta.
                 title
                      is the fallback when all other methods have failed.   It
                      does  not rely on a key exchange with the DVD drive, but
                      rather uses a crypto attack to guess the title key.   On
                      rare cases this may fail because there is not enough en‐
                      crypted data on the disc to perform  a  statistical  at‐
                      tack,  but  in  the other hand it is the only way to de‐
                      crypt a DVD stored on a hard disc, or  a  DVD  with  the
                      wrong region on an RPC2 drive.

       DVDCSS_RAW_DEVICE
              Specify  the raw device to use.  Exact usage will depend on your
              operating system, the Linux utility to set  up  raw  devices  is
              raw(8)  for  instance.   Please note that on most operating sys‐
              tems, using a raw device requires highly aligned buffers:  Linux
              requires a 2048 bytes alignment (which is the size of a DVD sec‐
              tor).

       DVDCSS_VERBOSE
              Sets the libdvdcss verbosity level.
                 0    Outputs no messages at all.
                 1    Outputs error messages to stderr.
                 2    Outputs error messages and debug messages to stderr.

       DVDREAD_NOKEYS
              Skip retrieving all keys on startup.  Currently disabled.

       HOME   FIXME: Document this.

   libao2:
       AO_SUN_DISABLE_SAMPLE_TIMING
              FIXME: Document this.

       AUDIODEV
              FIXME: Document this.

       AUDIOSERVER
              Specifies the Network Audio System server to which the nas audio
              output  driver  should  connect and the transport that should be
              used.  If unset DISPLAY is used instead.  The transport  can  be
              one  of  tcp  and  unix.   Syntax  is tcp/<somehost>:<someport>,
              <somehost>:<instancenumber> or [unix]:<instancenumber>.  The NAS
              base port is 8000 and <instancenumber> is added to that.

              EXAMPLES:
                 AUDIOSERVER=somehost:0
                      Connect to NAS server on somehost using default port and
                      transport.
                 AUDIOSERVER=tcp/somehost:8000
                      Connect to NAS server on somehost listening on TCP  port
                      8000.
                 AUDIOSERVER=(unix)?:0
                      Connect to NAS server instance 0 on localhost using unix
                      domain sockets.

       DISPLAY
              FIXME: Document this.

   vidix:
       VIDIX_CRT
              FIXME: Document this.

       VIDIXIVTVALPHA
              Set this to 'disable' in order to stop  the  VIDIX  driver  from
              controlling  alphablending settings.  You can then manipulate it
              yourself with 'ivtvfbctl'.

   osdep:
       TERM   FIXME: Document this.

   libvo:
       DISPLAY
              FIXME: Document this.

       FRAMEBUFFER
              FIXME: Document this.

       HOME   FIXME: Document this.

   libmpdemux:
       HOME   FIXME: Document this.

       HOMEPATH
              FIXME: Document this.

       http_proxy
              FIXME: Document this.

       LOGNAME
              FIXME: Document this.

       USERPROFILE
              FIXME: Document this.

   GUI:
       DISPLAY
              The name of the display to which the GUI should connect.

       HOME   The home directory of the current user.

   libavformat:
       AUDIO_FLIP_LEFT
              FIXME: Document this.

       BKTR_DEV
              FIXME: Document this.

       BKTR_FORMAT
              FIXME: Document this.

       BKTR_FREQUENCY
              FIXME: Document this.

       http_proxy
              FIXME: Document this.

       no_proxy
              FIXME: Document this.

FILES
       /usr/local/etc/mplayer/mplayer.conf
              MPlayer system-wide settings

       /usr/local/etc/mplayer/mencoder.conf
              MEncoder system-wide settings

       ~/.mplayer/config
              MPlayer user settings

       ~/.mplayer/mencoder.conf
              MEncoder user settings

       ~/.mplayer/input.conf
              input bindings (see '-input keylist' for the full list)

       ~/.mplayer/gui.conf
              GUI configuration file

       ~/.mplayer/gui.gain
              for audio files not containing ReplayGain data, add a line  with
              replay gain and filename separated by a space character, e.g.

              +1.50 /home/me/music/Song.mp3

       ~/.mplayer/gui.history
              GUI directory history

       ~/.mplayer/gui.pl
              GUI playlist

       ~/.mplayer/gui.url
              GUI URL list

       ~/.mplayer/font/
              font  directory  (There  must be a font.desc file and files with
              .RAW extension.)

       ~/.mplayer/DVDkeys/
              cached CSS keys

EXAMPLES OF MPLAYER USAGE
       Quickstart Blu-ray playing:
       mplayer br:////path/to/disc
       mplayer br:// -bluray-device /path/to/disc

       Quickstart DVD playing:
       mplayer dvd://1

       Play in Japanese with English subtitles:
       mplayer dvd://1 -alang ja -slang en

       Play only chapters 5, 6, 7:
       mplayer dvd://1 -chapter 5-7

       Play only titles 5, 6, 7:
       mplayer dvd://5-7

       Play a multiangle DVD:
       mplayer dvd://1 -dvdangle 2

       Play from a different DVD device:
       mplayer dvd://1 -dvd-device /dev/dvd2

       Play DVD video from a directory with VOB files:
       mplayer dvd://1 -dvd-device /path/to/directory/

       Copy a DVD title to hard disk, saving to file title1.vob :
       mplayer dvd://1 -dumpstream -dumpfile title1.vob

       Play a DVD with dvdnav from path /dev/sr1:
       mplayer dvdnav:////dev/sr1

       Stream from HTTP:
       mplayer http://mplayer.hq/example.avi

       Stream using RTSP:
       mplayer rtsp://server.example.com/streamName

       Convert subtitles to MPsub format:
       mplayer dummy.avi -sub source.sub -dumpmpsub

       Convert subtitles to MPsub format without watching the movie:
       mplayer /dev/zero -rawvideo pal:fps=xx -demuxer rawvideo -vc null -vo null -noframedrop -benchmark -sub source.sub -dumpmpsub

       input from standard V4L:
       mplayer tv:// -tv driver=v4l:width=640:height=480:outfmt=i420 -vc rawi420 -vo xv

       Playback on Zoran cards (old style, deprecated):
       mplayer -vo zr -vf scale=352:288 file.avi

       Playback on Zoran cards (new style):
       mplayer -vo zr2 -vf scale=352:288,zrmjpeg file.avi

       Play DTS-CD with passthrough:
       mplayer -ac hwdts -rawaudio format=0x2001 -cdrom-device /dev/cdrom cdda://
       You can also use -afm hwac3 instead of -ac hwdts.  Adjust  '/dev/cdrom'
       to  match  the CD-ROM device on your system.  If your external receiver
       supports decoding raw DTS streams, you can directly play it via cdda://
       without setting format, hwac3 or hwdts.

       Play a 6-channel AAC file with only two speakers:
       mplayer -rawaudio format=0xff -demuxer rawaudio -af pan=2:.32:.32:.39:.06:.06:.39:.17:-.17:-.17:.17:.33:.33 adts_he-aac160_51.aac
       You  might  want to play a bit with the pan values (e.g multiply with a
       value) to increase volume or avoid clipping.

       checkerboard invert with geq filter:
       mplayer -vf geq='128+(p(X\,Y)-128)*(0.5-gt(mod(X/SW\,128)\,64))*(0.5-gt(mod(Y/SH\,128)\,64))*4'

EXAMPLES OF MENCODER USAGE
       Encode DVD title #2, only selected chapters:
       mencoder dvd://2 -chapter 10-15 -o title2.avi -oac copy -ovc lavc -lavcopts vcodec=mpeg4

       Encode DVD title #2, resizing to 640x480:
       mencoder dvd://2 -vf scale=640:480 -o title2.avi -oac copy -ovc lavc -lavcopts vcodec=mpeg4

       Encode DVD title #2, resizing to 512xHHH (keep aspect ratio):
       mencoder dvd://2 -vf scale -zoom -xy 512 -o title2.avi -oac copy -ovc lavc -lavcopts vcodec=mpeg4

       The same, but with bitrate set to 1800kbit and optimized macroblocks:
       mencoder dvd://2 -o title2.avi -oac copy -ovc lavc -lavcopts vcodec=mpeg4:mbd=1:vbitrate=1800

       The same, but with MJPEG compression:
       mencoder dvd://2 -o title2.avi -oac copy -ovc lavc -lavcopts vcodec=mjpeg:mbd=1:vbitrate=1800

       Encode all *.jpg files in the current directory:
       mencoder "mf://*.jpg" -mf fps=25 -o output.avi -ovc lavc -lavcopts vcodec=mpeg4

       Encode from a tuner (specify a format with -vf format):
       mencoder -tv driver=v4l:width=640:height=480 tv:// -o tv.avi -ovc raw

       Encode from a pipe:
       rar p test-SVCD.rar | mencoder -ovc lavc -lavcopts vcodec=mpeg4:vbitrate=800 -ofps 24 -

BUGS
       Don't panic.  If you find one, report it to us, but  please  make  sure
       you  have  read all of the documentation first.  Also look out for smi‐
       leys. :) Many bugs are the result of incorrect setup or  parameter  us‐
       age.  The bug reporting section of the documentation (http://www.mplay‐
       erhq.hu/DOCS/HTML/en/bugreports.html) explains how to create useful bug
       reports.

AUTHORS
       MPlayer  was initially written by Arpad Gereoffy.  See the AUTHORS file
       for a list of some of the many other contributors.

       MPlayer is (C) 2000-2022 The MPlayer Team

       This man page was written mainly by Gabucino, Jonas Jermann  and  Diego
       Biurrun.   It  is maintained by Diego Biurrun.  Please send mails about
       it to the MPlayer-DOCS mailing list.  Translation specific mails belong
       on the MPlayer-translations mailing list.



The MPlayer Project               2022-02-27                        MPlayer(1)
